Sony XDCAMEX PMW F3L User Manual

4-276-626-12(1)  
Solid-State Memory  
Camcorder  
PMW-F3K  
PMW-F3L  
Operating Instructions  
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly  
and retain it for future reference.  
© 2011 Sony Corporation  
For the customers in Europe  
For the Customers in Brazil only  
DESCARTE DE PILHAS E BATERIAS  
This product with the CE marking complies  
with the EMC Directive issued by the  
Commission of the European Community.  
Compliance with this directive implies  
conformity to the following European  
standards:  
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference  
(Emission)  
• EN55103-2:Electromagnetic Susceptibility  
(Immunity)  
This product is intended for use in the  
following Electromagnetic Environments: E1  
(residential), E2 (commercial and light  
industrial), E3 (urban outdoors), E4  
(controlled EMC environment, ex. TV studio).  
Pilhas e Baterias Não Recarregáveis  
Atenção:  
Verifique as instruções de uso do aparelho  
certificando-se de que as polaridades (+) e  
(-) estão no sentido indicado. As pilhas  
poderão vazar ou explodir se as  
polaridades forem invertidas, expostas ao  
fogo, desmontadas ou recarregadas.  
The manufacturer of this product is Sony  
Corporation, 1-7-1 Konan, Minato-ku, Tokyo,  
Japan.  
The Authorized Representative for EMC and  
product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH,  
Hedelfinger Strasse 61, 70327 Stuttgart,  
Germany. For any service or guarantee  
matters please refer to the addresses given  
in separate service or guarantee documents.  
Evite misturar com pilhas de outro tipo ou  
com pilhas usadas, transportá-las ou  
armazená-las soltas, pois aumenta o risco  
de vazamento.  
Retire as pilhas caso o aparelho não  
esteja sendo utilizado, para evitar  
possíveis danos na eventualidade de  
ocorrer vazamento.  
For the State of California, USA only  
Perchlorate Material - special handling may  
apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/  
hazardouswaste/perchlorate  
Perchlorate Material: Lithium battery  
contains perchlorate.  
As pilhas devem ser armazenadas em  
local seco e ventilado.  
No caso de vazamento da pilha, evite o  
contato com a mesma. Lave qualquer  
parte do corpo afetado com água  
abundante. Ocorrendo irritação, procure  
auxílio médico.  
For the customers in Taiwan only  
Não remova o invólucro da pilha.  
Mantenha fora do alcance das crianças.  
Em caso de ingestão procure auxílio  
médico imediatamente.  
3
Table of Contents  
Checking the Remaining Time Available for  
Table of Contents  
4
Table of Contents  
5
Registering the Customized Settings as a Picture  
Playing Back the Selected and Subsequent Clips in  
Table of Contents  
6
Adding/Deleting the OK Mark to/from a Clip  
Displaying the SHOT MARK Screen  
Table of Contents  
7
Recording the Camcorder Picture on an External  
Table of Contents  
8
Overview  
Features  
The PMW-F3K/F3L is a highly compact and  
high-performance digital cinema camcorder that  
uses SxS memory cards as its recording  
medium. It employs a Super-35mm-equivalent  
single-plate CMOS sensor as the imaging device.  
With the exclusive PL mount adapter, various PL-  
mount lenses can be used.  
The Dual-Link connectors enable Dual-Link  
output of 1080/50P or 1080/59.94P signals.  
Dual-Link output function  
Signals of 1080/50P or 1080/59.94P fed from the  
HD SDI A/B (Dual-Link) connectors can be  
recorded on an external device.  
1)  
Long recording time  
By utilizing an efficient compression format, the  
PMW-F3K/F3L records high-quality HD images  
for long recording time of approx. 200 minutes in  
HQ mode (35 Mbps VBR) or approx. 280  
minutes in SP mode (25 Mbps CBR) on a single  
64-GB SxS memory card. Equipped with two SxS  
memory card slots, the PMW-F3K/F3L makes  
transition seamless without any frame loss, when  
recording is done across two cards.  
Multiple-format recording  
The PMW-F3K/F3L camcorder offers a wide  
array of recording formats for multiple content  
creation applications. In addition to HD video of  
1080 or 720 effective scan lines, the camcorder  
can also record and play back in DVCAM-  
compatible mode.  
Switching between Progressive and Interlace and  
between NTSC and PAL are also possible,  
permitting you to use various formats for your  
needs.  
High-quality uncompressed audio recording  
In addition to HD video recording, the PMW-  
F3K/F3L can record and play back high-quality,  
two-channel 16-bit, 48-kHz linear PCM  
uncompressed audio.  
IT friendly  
The file-based recording in MP4 format allows  
material to be handled with great flexibility in an  
IT-based environment, easily available for  
copying, transferring, sharing, and archiving.  
SxS memory cards can simultaneously hold  
multiple files of any of these recording formats,  
allowing for flexible use of the memory cards.  
Instant-access thumbnail display with “Expand”  
function  
Each time a recording is started and stopped on  
the camcorder, the video and audio signals are  
recorded as one clip.  
Furthermore, thumbnails are automatically  
generated for each clip as a visual reference,  
allowing the operator to cue-up to a desired scene  
simply by guiding the cursor to a thumbnail. For  
further convenience, the ‘Expand’ function  
allows one selected clip in the Thumbnail display  
to be divided into 12 equal time intervals, each  
with its own thumbnail identifier. This is useful if  
you wish to quickly search for a particular scene  
within a lengthy clip.  
HD Recording System  
Nonlinear recording media  
Using SxS memory cards, the PMW-F3K/F3L  
offers nonlinear capabilities such as instant  
random access and file-based operation.  
HD recording using the “MPEG-2 Long GOP”  
codec  
The PMW-F3K/F3L records 1920 × 1080 HD  
images using “MPEG-2 Long GOP” codec  
compression. This mature “MPEG-2 Long GOP”  
1)  
codec, which is also adopted in the XDCAM  
2)  
HD and HDV 1080i series of products, enables  
you to record stunning-quality HD video and  
audio with long recording time by efficiently  
compressing the data.  
S-LOG gamma and MLUT (Monitor Look Up  
Table) usable  
The PMW-F3K/F3L can use S-LOG (Sony Log)  
gamma and MLUT when the CBK-RGB01 RGB  
and S-LOG Output Option (not supplied) is  
installed and RGB444 is selected for Dual-Link  
Selectable bit rates  
The PMW-F3K/F3L offers a choice of bit rates:  
either 35 Mbps (HQ mode) or 25 Mbps (SP  
mode), depending on the desired picture quality  
and recording time.  
Features  
10  
   
output. This feature is effective when you create  
digital masters using digital processing.  
shooting over long periods of time and also when  
creating pictures with special effects of extremely  
quick motion.  
Cutting-edge Camera Technologies  
Frame Recording function  
Frame Recording is a unique feature of the PMW-  
F3K/F3L camcorder that is especially useful for  
clay-animation shooting. With this function,  
images for pre-determined frame are recorded  
each time the record button is pressed.  
1)  
Super 35-mm type “Exmor” CMOS sensor  
The PMW-F3K/F3L is equipped with a newly  
developed Super 35 “Exmor” CMOS sensor,  
which delivers excellent picture performance  
with full HD resolution.  
Shutter-angle settings  
PL lens mount with hot shoes  
In addition to the electric shutter speed controls,  
the PMW-F3K/F3L also has a “shutter angle”  
control, which is familiar to cinematographers.  
The camcorder is equipped with hot shoes for the  
3)  
Cooke /i Intelligent Electronic Lens System in  
addition to the dedicated lenses supplied with the  
PMW-F3K. When a lens with corresponding  
characteristics is mounted, information regarding  
the lens, such as the type, serial number, iris  
setting, and focus position, may be available for  
on-screen displays and metadata recording.  
Picture Profile feature  
The Picture Profile feature allows the camera  
operator to easily call up customized picture-  
tonal settings to suit particular shooting  
conditions.  
Picture Cache function  
Focus-assistance functions  
Functions for easy and precise focus adjustments  
are provided.  
• Expanded Focus  
• Peaking  
The unit can utilize its internal memory to store  
the image being captured, allowing recording to  
commence a certain time (15 seconds at  
maximum) in advance of when the recording  
button is pressed.  
Creative Recording Modes and Settings  
Planning Metadata function  
The PMW-F3K/F3L can load planning metadata  
prepared by a computer and shoot with the clip  
names and shot marks specified in the planning  
metadata.  
23.98P native recording  
The PMW-F3K/F3L camcorder, a new member  
1)  
of Sony’s legendary CineAlta family, though  
compact offers native 23.98P recording  
capability.  
Wireless LAN supported  
Slow & Quick Motion function  
The PMW-F3K/F3L offers a Slow & Quick  
Motion function, commonly known as  
overcranking and undercranking in film shooting,  
which enables you to create unique ‘looks’ or  
special effects of slow- and fast-motion images.  
The PMW-F3K/F3L can be connected to a  
computer via a wireless LAN (Wi-Fi connection)  
when the CBK-RGB01 RGB and S-LOG Output  
Option (not supplied) is installed and the CBK-  
WA01 Wi-Fi Adapter is connected to the Option  
connector.  
A Wi-Fi connection allows you to transfer  
planning metadata from a computer to the  
camcorder, and to transfer clips and other files  
from the camcorder to a computer. You can also  
use the Live Logging function to transfer  
metadata to a computer or receive them from a  
computer during shooting.  
Slow Shutter function  
The PMW-F3K/F3L offers a Slow Shutter  
function for capturing clear images in low-light  
environments.  
Selectable gamma curves  
The PMW-F3K/F3L provides various types of  
gamma identical to those of other CineAlta  
camcorders.  
A variety of functions and designs for  
high operability  
Interval Recording function  
The PMW-F3K/F3L offers an Interval Recording  
function that intermittently records signals at pre-  
determined intervals. This is convenient for  
• Depth-of-field indicator  
• Brightness-level display  
Features  
11  
• Histogram indicator  
Korea  
• 3.5-inch color LCD monitor  
• Easy-to-see color viewfinder  
• Eight assignable buttons  
http://bp.sony.co.kr/xdcamex  
China  
http://pro.sony.com.cn/minisite/XDCAMEX  
• Long operating time with a battery pack  
• Wide array of interfaces, including USB,  
Japan  
1)  
4)  
http://www.sony.co.jp/XDCAMEX  
i.LINK , and HDMI  
• ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)  
• Built-in ND filter wheel and electric CC filter  
(5600K)  
• Selectable gain  
• High-speed picture search: ×4, ×15, ×24  
• Freeze Mix function  
• Image Inversion function (horizontal only)  
1)  
• IR Remote Commander supplied  
• Input/output connectors for external  
synchronization  
• Operations from the optional remote control  
units: The camcorder can be operated from the  
RM-B750/B150 Remote Control Unit.  
1)Sony, XDCAM, XDCAM EX, SxS, i.LINK, Exmor,  
CineAlta, and Remote Commander are trademarks of  
Sony Corporation.  
2)HDV is a trademark of Sony Corporation and Victor  
Company of Japan, Limited.  
3)Cooke Optics Limited  
4)HDMI, HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and other  
countries.  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective  
owners.  
XDCAM EX web sites  
For information on XDCAM EX, visit the  
following web sites:  
United States  
http://www.sony.com/xdcamex  
Canada  
http://www.sony.ca/xdcamex  
Europe, Middle East, Africa, and Russia  
http://www.sonybiz.net/xdcamex  
Latin America  
http://www.sonypro-latin.com/xdcamex  
Australia  
www.sony.com.au/xdcamex  
Asia (except Korea, China, and Japan)  
http://pro.sony-asia.com  
Features  
12  
 
Using the Software  
Reading the CD-ROM  
Manuals  
The supplied CD-ROM (labeled “Utility  
Software for XDCAM”) contains application and  
device driver software required to access to SxS  
memory cards from a computer and to manage  
material shot with the camcorder.  
Preparations  
The following program must be installed on your  
computer in order to read the documents  
contained on the CD-ROM.  
Information about how to install the software is  
provided in PDF format.  
Adobe Reader Version 6.0 or higher  
Memo  
Note  
If Adobe Reader is not installed, you can  
download it from the following URL:  
You must install the SxS device driver on your  
computer if your computer is equipped with an  
ExpressCard slot and you want to use it to access  
SxS memory cards.  
http://www.adobe.com/  
Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe  
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other  
countries.  
To read the documents  
Do the following:  
1
Insert the CD-ROM in your CD-ROM  
drive.  
A cover page appears automatically in your  
browser.  
If it does not appear automatically in the  
browser, double-click on the index.htm file  
on the CD-ROM.  
2
Select and click on the manual that you  
wish to read.  
This opens the PDF file.  
Memo  
The files may not be displayed properly,  
depending on the version of Adobe Reader. In  
such a case, install the latest version you can  
download from the URL mentioned in  
“Preparations” above.  
Note  
If you have lost or damaged the CD-ROM, you  
can purchase a new one to replace it. Contact your  
Sony service representative.  
Using the Software / Reading the CD-ROM Manuals  
13  
     
Parts Identifications  
For functions and usage, see the pages shown in parentheses.  
Camcorder  
1
2
7
N
IG  
S
S
A
P
O
C
E
SSIGN  
A
6
T
/S  
R
T
R
A
T
S
5
3
Upper operation  
B
A
R
S
/C  
A
M
T
H
U
M
B
F
N
A
R
E
IL  
V
P
/
L
A
Y
/P  
P
R
E
A
U
V
S
E
F
S
F
W
D
T
6
O
P
N
E
X
L
T
E
N
S
IN  
F
O
B
R
T
D
IS  
P
56  
00  
H
IS  
K
T
O
G
C
C
1
R
A
M
7 8  
2
B
A
I
D
S
N
S
D
S
F
IG  
N
D
IL  
3
H
T
E
R
A
4
2
SDI OUT  
R
Y
R
TE  
AS  
1
T
E
C
E
L
A
C
R
E
E
BA  
LE  
C
N
A
H
C
E
C
R
T
E
/S  
L
E
S
T
U
O
OFF  
U
O
E
N
E
M
ID  
V
OFILE  
9
PICTURE PR  
S&Q  
CH-1  
Side panel  
B
A
Rear panel  
A
U
D
V
IO  
TC IN  
LE  
E
L
C
H-2  
S
H
U
T
T
O
E
R
N
FF  
O
G
A
IN  
W
H
IT  
CH-1  
AU  
B
E
C
A
D
TC OUT  
L
L
IO  
A
N
SELECT  
M
E
A
T
CH-2  
H
W
Z
E
A
A
U
B
T
R
O
A
M
B
P
E
N
U
A
K
A
A
IN  
L
G
MONIT  
VO  
P
R
S
T
OR  
IN  
K
C
LO  
L
S
U
T
M
A
T
TC/U-BIT/  
DURA  
E
N
E
U
S
G
TION DISPLA  
OFF  
ON  
BA  
TT INFO  
Y/  
T
C
E
L
E
S
T
O
L
S
A
S
S
IG  
N
5
IN  
C
D
10  
1. Microphone holder (page 31)  
2. Front accessory shoe  
Note  
4. Accessory mounting screw holes  
Type of screw: 1/4-20UNC, length of  
13  
engagement: 10 mm (  
/
inch) or less  
32  
Note  
Do not apply excessive force to the mounted  
accessory. It may damage the accessory shoe.  
Do not apply excessive force to the mounted  
accessory. It may damage the screw thread.  
3. Post for the shoulder strap (left and right)  
Attach the supplied shoulder strap as shown  
below.  
5. Rear accessory shoe  
Notes  
• The length of engagement should be 5.2  
7
mm ( / inch) or less.  
32  
To remove  
• Do not apply excessive force to the mount-  
ed accessory. It may damage the screw  
thread.  
PRESS  
6. Headphone connector (stereo mini jack)  
7. Rear tally lamp (page 38, page 149)  
8. Rear IR remote control receptor  
9. BATTERY RELEASE button (page 22)  
Press the tab to  
unlock.  
10. Battery pack receptacle (page 22)  
Parts Identifications  
14  
       
1
Operation block on the  
2
3
S
T
A
R
T
/ S  
R
T
E
O
C
P
A
S
S
G
I
N
7
6
A S S I G N  
4
5
6
13  
14  
s
M
A
C
/
S
R
A
B
H
D
L
R
E
M
C
I
O
(H  
R
E
U
T
V
I
E
W
E
X
P
A
C
F
N
O
D
E
U
D
S
15  
W
IN  
K
D
V
/D  
V
T
)
ASSIGN  
8
REC START/  
STOP  
16  
A
1
U
R
D
I
E
C
O
M
H
-
I
O
N
T
E
S
P
A
R
E
M
IC  
L
IN  
E
C
H
M
IC  
-
2
+
4
8
V
M
IC  
L
IN  
7
E
M
IC  
+
4
8
V
C
H
-
1
A
U
D
IO  
ASSIGN  
4
O
U
T
C
H
-
2
17  
18  
8
AUTO  
WHT BAL  
9
10  
11 12  
1. Viewfinder (page 27)  
2. Eyepiece focusing knob (page 27)  
3. Post for the shoulder strap (See the  
previous page.)  
16. Flange focal length adjustment screw  
17. ASSIGN 4 (assignable 4) button (page 61)  
18. AUTO WHT BAL (automatic white  
balance adjustment) button (page 43)  
4. Built-in speaker (page 57, page 90)  
5. REC REVIEW button (page 60)  
6. EXPANDED FOCUS button (page 51)  
7. REC START/STOP button (page 38)  
8. Grip belt  
9. Servo zoom lever  
It does not function at present.  
10. ASSIGN 8 (assignable 8) button (page 61)  
11. AUDIO OUT CH-1/CH-2 connectors  
(RCA phono jacks) (page 134)  
12. AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors (XLR)  
and input selection switches (page 56)  
13. Front tally lamp (page 38, page 149)  
14. Front IR remote control receptor  
15. Lens mount (page 29)  
Parts Identifications  
15  
Side panel  
1
18  
17  
LENS INFO BRT DISP HISTOGRAM  
CACHE  
REC  
ASSIGN  
1
2
3
2
3
16  
15  
5600K CC  
S&Q  
CH-1  
ND FILTER  
2
AUDIO  
LEVEL  
CH-2  
CH-2  
1
AUDIO  
CH-1  
SELECT  
AUTO  
14  
13  
MANUAL  
OFF  
MONITOR  
VOLUME  
SHUTTER  
OFF ON  
WHITE  
TC/U-BIT/ DISPLAY/  
GAIN BALANCE  
ZEBRA PEAKING  
STATUS DURATION BATT INFO  
ASSIGN 5  
4
L
M
H
ATW  
B
A
PRST  
9 10 11 12  
5 6 7 8  
1. ASSIGN (assignable) 1/2/3 buttons (page  
18. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) monitor  
The display is turned on when you unlock the  
panel by pressing the tab to the right then  
open it.  
2. 5600K CC (color compensation filter)  
button with indicator (page 42)  
3. ND FILTER switch (page 42)  
4. SHUTTER switch (page 48)  
5. GAIN switch (page 47)  
19 20  
6. WHITE BALANCE (white balance  
memory) switch (page 43)  
L
C
D
B
R
IG  
H
T
7. ZEBRA button (page 46)  
8. PEAKING button (page 51)  
9. STATUS button (page 101)  
L
C
D
B
.L  
IG  
H
O
T
N
O
F
F
1
2
10. TC/U-BIT/DURATION (time data  
selection) button (page 55, page 90)  
11. DISPLAY/BATT INFO button (page 20,  
19. LCD BRIGHT +/– (LCD brightness  
12. ASSIGN 5 (assignable 5) button (page 61)  
adjustment) buttons (page 26)  
13. MONITOR VOLUME buttons (page 57,  
20. LCD B.LIGHT (LCD backlight) switch  
14. AUDIO SELECT (audio level control  
mode selection) switches (page 56)  
15. AUDIO LEVEL CH-1 /CH-2 controls  
16. S&Q (Slow & Quick Motion) dial (page 67,  
17. CACHE REC lamp (page 65)  
Parts Identifications  
16  
 
Operation block on the handle  
Rear panel  
Operation block  
3
2
1
1
2
3 4  
A
HD SDI  
B
MENU  
A
SEL/SET  
CANCEL  
BATTERY  
RELEASE  
B
PICTURE PROFILE  
1. Protective cover (page 38)  
2. ASSIGN 6/7 (assignable 6 and 7) buttons  
3. REC START/STOP (recording start/stop)  
SLOT SELECT  
DC IN  
ON OFF  
5
Upper operation block  
1
2
3
4
1. MENU (menu display ON/OFF) button  
BARS/CAM  
F REV PLAY/PAUSE F FWD  
j
PREV  
l
G/S  
J
NEXT  
L
2. SEL/SET (selection/set) dial (Jog dial)  
THUMBNAIL  
STOP  
s
It functions accordingly when you turn it up  
or down, or you push it horizontally.  
5
6
7
8
3. CANCEL button (page 107)  
4. PICTURE PROFILE button (page 70)  
5. Power switch and indicator (page 24)  
1. BARS/CAM (color bar/camera signal  
switching) button (page 57)  
2. F REV (fast reverse) button (page 89)  
3. PLAY/PAUSE button (page 89)  
4. F FWD (fast forward) button (page 89)  
5. THUMBNAIL button (page 85)  
6. PREV (previous) button (page 89)  
7. STOP button (page 89)  
Card slot block  
Open the cover to insert/remove SxS memory  
cards.  
A
B
PICTU  
2
3
8. NEXT button (page 89)  
4
SLOT SELECT  
ON OFF  
1
1. SLOT SELECT (SxS memory card select)  
2. Access lamps (page 35)  
3. SxS memory card slots (page 35)  
4. Eject buttons (page 35)  
Parts Identifications  
17  
       
For operation from the remote control device,  
refer to the Supplement in the supplied CD-  
ROM labeled “Manuals for Solid-State Memory  
Camcorder.”  
Connector block  
1
A
HD SDI  
B
13. SPARE connector (10-pin)  
It does not function at present.  
MENU  
A
SEL/SET  
CANCEL  
SDI OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
TC IN  
BATTERY  
RELEASE  
B
PICTURE PROFILE  
Bottom  
8
9
10  
11  
1
2
3
TC OUT  
SLOT SELECT  
DC IN  
ON OFF  
12  
13  
GENLOCK IN  
2
3 4 5 6 7  
1. HD SDI A/B (Dual-Link) connectors  
(BNC type) (page 135)  
2. DC IN (DC power input) connector  
1. Tripod receptacles  
3. SDI OUT connector (BNC type) (page 134)  
Note  
4. VIDEO OUT (analog video output)  
Check that the size of the hole matches the  
screw of the tripod. If they do not match, the  
camcorder cannot be attached to the tripod  
securely.  
connector (BNC type) (page 134)  
5. TC IN (timecode input) connector (BNC  
2. Backup battery holder (page 145)  
6. TC OUT (timecode output) connector  
(BNC type) (page 142)  
3. Accessory mounting screw hole  
Type of screw: 1/4-20UNC, length of  
13  
7. GENLOCK IN connector (BNC type)  
engagement: 10 mm (  
/
inch) or less  
32  
Note  
8. HDMI OUT connector (page 134)  
Do not apply excessive force to the mounted  
accessory. It may damage the screw thread.  
9. i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector (4-pin, S400  
conforming to IEEE1394) (page 138)  
10. USB connector (Mini B) (page 135)  
11. Option connector (USB type A)  
The optional CBK-WA01 Wi-Fi Adapter can  
be connected.  
For connection, refer to the Supplement in the  
supplied CD-ROM labeled “Manuals for Solid-  
State Memory Camcorder.”  
For the mounting bracket for the Wi-Fi Adapter,  
contact your Sony dealer or Sony service  
representative.  
12. REMOTE connector (8-pin)  
An external remote control device, such as  
the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit,  
can be connected.  
Parts Identifications  
18  
       
IR Remote Commander (Supplied)  
Lenses (Supplied with the PMW-  
F3K)  
The buttons without remarks can be used in the  
same manner as the corresponding buttons on the  
camcorder.  
1
2
1
2
2
2
4
PUSH SET  
1
SHOTMARK  
2
T
ZOOM  
W
5
8
1
1
9
10  
11  
50  
2 2  
3
4
5
6
THUMBNAIL SUB CLIP  
0
PREV  
PLAY/PAUSE  
NEXT  
STOP  
.
u
>
x
FREV  
FFWD  
m
M
REC  
REC PAUSE  
PUSH AF  
12  
13  
z
X
7
8
The illustration shows the SCL-P50T20.  
1. Focus ring  
1. ZOOM T/W (telephoto/wide-angle)  
button  
2. Iris ring  
It does not function at present.  
2. SHOTMARK 1 and 2 buttons (page 58,  
3. THUMBNAIL button  
4. PREV (previous clip jump) button  
5. F REV (fast reverse) button  
6. PLAY/PAUSE button  
7. REC (record) buttons  
Press the z button together with the unmarked  
button (safety button) to start recording.  
8. REC PAUSE buttons  
Press the X button together with the unmarked  
button (safety button) to pause recording.  
9. PUSH SET button  
It functions the same as the SEL/SET dial on the  
camcorder.  
10. NEXT button  
11. STOP button  
12. F FWD (fast forward) button  
13. PUSH AF button  
It does not function at present.  
Note  
The SUB CLIP button does not function with this  
camcorder.  
When you use the Remote Commander, see “Using  
Parts Identifications  
19  
   
On-Screen Indications  
Indications in E-E Display/Recording Mode  
1)  
When this unit is in E-E Display /Recording  
mode, pressing the DISPLAY/BATT INFO  
button displays the statuses and settings of this  
unit on the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.  
When you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO  
button again, these indications are canceled.  
Remarks  
[M]: The indication of the items named with this  
suffix can be independently turned on/off  
with “Display On/Off” of the LCD/VF SET  
[A]: The indication of items named with this suf-  
fix can be turned on/off using the assignable  
buttons to which the corresponding on/off  
functions have been assigned (see page 61).  
The recording status indication, such as “zREC,”  
is always displayed, regardless of operation of the  
DISPLAY/BATT INFO button.  
1)E-E Display mode: Recording standby status  
1
2
3
4
5
120min STBY  
S&Q REC  
TCG 00:00:00:00  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
A: 60min  
B: 120min  
Z99  
HQ  
1920/23.98P  
S&Q Motion  
29/24fps  
6
ABCD0001  
7
8
9
Rec 2  
MLUT:P1:709 800%  
(
)
10 5600K CC  
74%  
11  
12  
ND1  
High Light ND2  
TLCS  
.
1
1.5  
2
3
4
5
7
10 15 20 30  
oo  
m
++  
ATW 4300K PPOFF  
T1.6 18dB SHT:1/2000 CH1  
CH2  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
1. Battery remaining/DC IN voltage  
indication [M] (page 22)  
INT STBY  
Standby for Interval  
Recording  
zFRM REC  
FRM STBY  
zCACHE  
Frame Recording in progress  
Standby for Frame Recording  
z in green: Standby for  
Cache Recording  
2. i.LINK status indication (page 138)  
Only when an external device is connected to  
the i.LINK connector, the status of the device is  
displayed.  
z in red: Cache Recording in  
progress  
3. Special recording/operation status  
indication  
4. Media status indication  
zREC  
Recording in progress  
STBY  
Standby for recording  
Slow & Quick Motion  
recording in progress  
Standby for Slow & Quick  
Motion recording  
Memory card in slot A is active.  
zS&Q REC  
Memory card in slot B is active.  
S&Q STBY  
5. Time data indication [M] (page 55)  
6. Media remaining indication [M] (page 36)  
zINT REC  
Interval Recording in progress  
On-Screen Indications  
20  
         
7. Zoom position indication [M] (page 51)  
8. Synchronized recording indication (page  
Displayed when “HD SDI Remote I/F” is  
selected with “SDI REC Control” of the VIDEO  
SET menu.  
9. S-LOG LUT indication (page 116)  
10. Electric color compensation filter  
indication [M] (page 42)  
11. ND filter indication [M] (page 42)  
12. TLCS mode indication [M] (page 112)  
Backlight mode  
Standard mode  
S
TD  
Spotlight mode  
13. White balance mode and color  
temperature indications [M] (page 43)  
14. Picture profile indication [M] (page 70)  
15. Iris position indication [M] (page 50)  
16. Gain indication [M] (page 47)  
17. Shutter mode/shutter speed indication [M]  
18. Audio level meters [M] (page 56)  
19. Histogram indication [M][A]  
20. Video level cautioning indication [M]  
If the video level is too high or too low, a caution  
is generated showing the appropriate ND filter  
number.  
21. Depth-of-Field indication [M][A]  
22. Brightness level indication [M][A]  
23. Clip name indication (page 81)  
24. Special recording mode indication [M]  
Frame Rec  
Interval Rec  
Frame Rec mode  
Interval Rec mode  
S&Q Motion  
xx/xx fps  
Slow & Quick Motion mode  
25. Video Format indication [M] (page 40)  
On-Screen Indications  
21  
 
Preparations  
Power Supply  
You can use a battery pack or AC power via an  
AC adaptor.  
If you connect an AC power source, it has a  
priority even if a battery pack is mounted.  
Battery pack  
For safety, use only the Sony battery pack and AC  
adaptor listed below:  
• BP-U60 Lithium-ion Battery Pack  
• AC-DN10 AC Adaptor  
Using a Battery Pack  
Power switch: OFF  
Mount a BP-U60 Lithium-ion Battery Pack.  
Note  
WARNING  
If a battery pack that cannot be used with this  
camcorder is mounted, an error message is  
appears on the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.  
Replace the battery pack with the BP-U60, or  
connect a power to the DC IN connector after  
removing the battery pack.  
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat  
such as sunshine, fire or the like.  
CAUTION  
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly  
replaced. Replace only with the same or  
equivalent type recommended by the  
manufacturer.  
Removing the battery pack  
Hold the BATTERY RELEASE button pressed,  
slide the battery pack upwards to unlock, then  
pull it out.  
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey  
the law in the relative area or country.  
Notes  
BATTERY RELEASE button  
• Before use, charge the battery pack with the  
exclusive BC-U1/U2 Battery Charger.  
• A warm battery pack immediately after use may  
not be able to be fully recharged.  
1
Mounting the battery pack  
Fully insert the battery pack then slide it down to  
lock.  
2
Power switch: OFF  
Checking battery charge remaining  
To check during operation  
When recording or playback is in progress on the  
battery pack, an icon to show the current battery  
Power Supply  
22  
                 
charge level and usage time remaining are  
displayed on the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.  
BATTERY I NFO  
50  
0
%
%
100%  
120min
A: 25min  
S&Q REC  
T
Rem  
aining Ti  
m
e
:
20min  
B: 50min  
Z99  
Icon  
Remaining  
100% to 91%  
90% to 71%  
70% to 51%  
50% to 31%  
30% to 11%  
10% to 0%  
The camcorder indicates the remaining usage  
time in minutes by calculating the available time  
with the battery pack if operation is continued at  
the current rate of power consumption.  
DISPLAY/  
BATT INFO  
Note  
DISPLAY/BATT INFO button  
The operating time on a battery pack depends on  
the condition (new or old) of the battery pack and  
the ambient temperature.  
If the battery charge remaining becomes  
low  
To check in power-off status  
Information on the mounted battery pack  
(BATTERY INFO) is displayed on the LCD  
monitor screen when you hold the DISPLAY/  
BATT INFO button pressed even if the  
camcorder is off.  
If the battery charge remaining decreases to a  
certain level during operation (Low BATT  
status), a low-battery message, flashing of the  
tally lamps, and a beep sound will warn you.  
If the remaining further decreases to a level at  
which operation cannot be continued (BATT  
Empty status), a battery-empty message appears.  
Temporarily set the power switch to OFF and  
connect a power source via the DC IN connector  
or replace the battery pack with one that is fully  
charged.  
The BATTERY INFO display goes off after 5  
seconds.  
To change the message levels  
The Low BATT level is set to 10% of full charge,  
and the BATT Empty level is set to 3% of full  
charge at the factory. These settings can be  
changed with “Battery Alarm” (page 124) of the  
OTHERS menu.  
Using AC Power (DC IN Power)  
The camcorder can be operated on AC power by  
using an AC-DN10 AC Adaptor (optional) with a  
CCDD-X2 DC Cable (optional).  
Power Supply  
23  
             
For details, refer to the Operating Instructions of the  
AC-DN10.  
Setting the Area of Use  
and the Clock  
When recording or playback is in progress on  
power from the DC IN connector, the input  
voltage is displayed on the LCD monitor/  
viewfinder screen.  
When you turn the camcorder on for the first time  
after purchasing or replacing the backup battery  
(page 145), the Initial Setting display appears on  
the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.  
Set the area of use and the date and time of the  
built-in clock, using this display.  
DC-  
IN 12.0V 
S&Q REC  
A: 25min  
B: 50min  
Z99  
INITIAL SETT  
I
NG  
NTSC Area  
lish  
C
ount r y  
Language  
Ti  
ate / Ti  
Fi nish  
:
:
Turning Power On  
E
ng  
m
e
Z
one: UTC GREENWICH  
e: 2011/01/01 00:00:00  
Set the power switch to the ON position.  
The indicator (green) lights and the camcorder  
enters E-E Display mode.  
D
m
Language  
You can select the language for messages.  
When you select “Chinese,” the menus and status  
indications are also displayed in Chinese.  
Time Zone  
The value shows the time difference from UTC  
(Coordinated Universal Time).  
Change the setting if needed.  
Use the jog dial on the rear panel for setting.  
Jog dial  
ON OFF  
Power switch  
MENU  
A
SEL/SET  
CANCEL  
B
PICTURE PROF  
Turning Power Off  
Set the power switch to the OFF position.  
Notes  
• This camcorder uses a little standby power even  
when the power switch is set to OFF. Remove  
the battery pack if the camcorder will not be  
used for a prolonged period.  
• When removing the battery pack or the DC IN  
power, be sure to set the switch to OFF in  
advance and wait until the indicator goes dark.  
Removing the battery pack or the DC IN power  
while the indicator is lit may cause damage to  
the camcorder or SxS memory cards.  
Setting the area of use  
1
Turn the jog dial to set the cursor to  
“Country” then press the dial.  
Setting the Area of Use and the Clock  
24  
                   
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu  
2
Turn the jog dial to select the desired  
area of use.  
Notes  
Setting  
Area of use  
• If the clock setting is cleared because of  
exhaustion of the backup battery while no  
operation power was being supplied (no battery  
pack and no DC IN connection), the Initial  
Setting display will be displayed when you turn  
the camcorder on at the next opportunity.  
• While the Initial Setting display is shown, no  
other operation except turning the power off is  
permitted until you finish the setting for this  
display.  
NTSC Area  
NTSC area (for areas other  
1)  
than Japan)  
2)  
NTSC(J) Area  
PAL Area  
NTSC area (Japan)  
3)  
PAL area  
1) The composite signal output from this  
camcorder is an NTSC signal with a black setup  
(7.5 IRE). The system frequency is 59.94i.  
2) The composite signal output from this  
camcorder is an NTSC signal with no black  
setup. The system frequency is 59.94i.  
3) The composite signal output from this  
camcorder is a PAL signal. The system  
frequency is 50i.  
Setting the time and date  
1
Turn the jog dial to set the cursor to  
“Date/Time” then press the dial.  
The cursor moves to the year-setting column.  
INITIAL SETT NG  
I
(
)
C
ount r y  
Language  
Ti  
ate / Ti  
Fi nish  
:
:
NTSC J Area  
Japanese  
m
e
Z
one: UTC +09:00  
e: 2011/01/01 00:00:00 SET  
TOKYO  
D
m
2
3
Turn the jog dial to set the year then  
press the dial.  
The cursor moves to the month-setting  
column.  
Set the month, day, hour, minute, and  
second in sequence in the same manner.  
When you press the jog dial at “SET,” the  
cursor moves back to “Date/Time.”  
To finish the setting  
Move the cursor to “Finish” then press the jog  
dial.  
The Initial Setting display disappears, and the  
clock setting is completed.  
Once after the Initial Setting display disappears,  
the time zone and date/time settings can be  
changed using the OTHERS menu (page 123).  
Setting the Area of Use and the Clock  
25  
 
subject. The display direction of the textual  
information is converted to the readable direction.  
Adjusting the LCD  
Monitor and Viewfinder  
Adjusting the LCD Monitor  
90°  
You can adjust the angle and the display  
conditions of the LCD monitor for the best view  
in various shooting situations.  
180°  
These adjustments of the LCD monitor have no  
effect on pictures being recorded.  
Adjusting the backlight  
Turning on/off the LCD monitor  
The LCD monitor turns on when it is opened and  
turns off when it is closed.  
LCD BRIGHT +/buttons  
Press the tab to the right to unlock.  
LCD B.LIGHT switch  
Adjusting the angle  
Turning the backlight on/off  
The backlight may not be necessary for viewing  
images on the LCD monitor under bright ambient  
light, such as in an outdoor location. Set the LCD  
B.LIGHT switch to OFF to turn off the backlight.  
Rotate the opened LCD monitor to the desired  
angle.  
Adjusting the brightness of the backlight  
When you set the LCD B.LIGHT switch to ON,  
you can adjust the brightness of the backlight,  
using the LCD BRIGHT + and – buttons.  
Press the – button to darken the backlight. Press  
the + button to make it brighter.  
During adjustment, the backlight level bar  
appears to indicate the adjustment value.  
It can be rotated as much as 180 degrees in the  
direction facing the subject and as much as 90  
degrees in the opposite direction.  
Adjusting the color, contrast, and  
brightness  
When you rotate it exceeding 135 degrees toward  
the subject, the image on the monitor becomes  
upside down, indicating the mirror image of the  
Using the menu  
The color, contrast, and brightness of the LCD  
monitor can be adjusted with the LCD/VF SET  
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder  
26  
             
menu.  
Adjusting the Viewfinder  
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to  
Menu mode and select  
(LCD/VF SET  
If the picture on the LCD monitor is hard to view  
under bright ambient light, you can use the  
viewfinder to check the picture.  
menu) then “LCD” from the menu.  
LCD/VF SET  
You can adjust the display conditions of the  
viewfinder according to your current lighting  
conditions.  
These adjustments of the viewfinder have no  
effect on pictures being recorded.  
B
LCD  
VF  
Peaking  
C
C
olor  
ont rast  
:
:
0
0
0
B
B
B
B
B
Brightness:  
00:00  
Marker  
Zebra  
Display  
On/Of f  
Caution  
Set color, contrast and brightness of the LCD  
monitor with the corresponding LCD menu  
items: Color, Contrast, and Brightness.  
Do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece of  
the viewfinder facing the sun. Direct sunlight can  
enter through the eyepiece, be focused in the  
viewfinder, and cause fire.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu  
Turning the viewfinder on/off  
Using the assignable button  
If you assign “LCD/VF Adjust” to one of the  
assignable buttons, you can adjust the contrast  
and brightness of the LCD monitor, using the  
assignable button and the jog dial.  
With the factory setting, the viewfinder is turned  
on when the LCD monitor is in its park position  
or is rotated to face the subject.  
You can change the setting so that the viewfinder  
is always on regardless of the status of the LCD  
monitor, using “VF” (page 117) of the LCD/VF  
SET menu. Change the “Power” setting from  
“Auto” to “On.”  
For how to assign the function, see “Changing  
1
Press the assignable button to which  
“LCD/VF Adjust” is assigned.  
The LCD Brightness Level bar is displayed  
on the LCD monitor.  
Adjusting the focus in the viewfinder  
The eyepiece focusing (diopter compensation)  
knob enables adjustment to match the eyesight of  
operator so that the operator can view the image  
clearly in the eyepiece.  
2
Adjust the brightness by turning the jog  
dial vertically.  
Turning the dial upwards makes the  
brightness brighter, and downwards makes it  
darker.  
Eyepiece focusing knob  
3
4
Press the assignable button again.  
The LCD Contrast Level bar is displayed on  
the LCD monitor.  
Adjust the contrast by turning the jog  
dial vertically.  
Turning the dial upwards makes the contrast  
stronger, and downwards makes it weaker.  
5
After the adjustment, press the jog dial  
or the CANCEL button to turn off the  
level bar.  
Adjusting the backlight  
The brightness of the backlight for the viewfinder  
can be switched between High and Low.  
Select “VF” from the LCD/VF SET menu and set  
“Backlight.”  
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder  
27  
                 
4
5
Press the assignable button again.  
LCD/VF SET  
The VF Contrast Level bar is displayed on  
the LCD monitor.  
B
B
B
B
B
B
LCD  
VF  
Peaking  
Backl i ght : High  
ode : Color  
ont rast  
Br ightness :  
er  
M
C
:
0
0
Adjust the contrast by turning the jog  
dial vertically.  
00:00  
Marker  
Zebra  
Po  
w
: Auto  
Turning the dial upwards makes the contrast  
stronger, and downwards makes it weaker.  
Display  
On/Of f  
Switching between color and  
monochrome modes  
6
After the adjustment, press the jog dial  
or the CANCEL button to turn off the  
level bar.  
For the viewfinder screen, color or monochrome  
display can be selected.  
Select “VF” from the LCD/VF SET menu then  
select “Mode.”  
Select “B&W” if checking the subject and  
focusing are easier on the monochrome display.  
If you assign “VF Mode” to one of the assignable  
buttons (see page 61), you can switch between  
color and monochrome by pressing the button.  
Adjusting the contrast and brightness  
Using the menu  
Select “VF” from the LCD/VF SET menu and  
adjust the contrast and brightness with the  
corresponding items: Contrast and Brightness.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu  
Using the assignable button  
If you assign “LCD/VF Adjust” to one of the  
assignable buttons, you can adjust the contrast  
and brightness of the viewfinder, using the  
assignable button and the jog dial.  
For how to assign the function, see “Changing  
1
Press the assignable button to which  
“LCD/VF Adjust” is assigned.  
The LCD Brightness Level bar is displayed  
on the LCD monitor.  
2
3
Press the assignable button twice to  
display the VF Brightness Level bar.  
Adjust the brightness by turning the jog  
dial vertically.  
Turning the dial upwards makes the  
brightness brighter, and downwards makes it  
darker.  
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder  
28  
 
1
Turn the lens mount frame  
counterclockwise and remove the  
mount cap from the lens mount.  
Attaching a Lens  
Usable lenses  
The following lenses are supplied with the PMW-  
F3K.  
• SCL-P35T20 (focal length: 35mm)  
• SCL-P50T20 (focal length: 50mm)  
• SCL-P85T20 (focal length: 85mm)  
In addition to equivalents of the lenses supplied  
with the PMW-F3K, various PL-mount lenses  
can be used with the PMW-F3K/F3L.  
2
3
Align the recess of the lens with the  
alignment pin at the upper part of the  
lens mount of the camcorder and set the  
lens in place.  
For other lenses usable with the PMW-F3K/F3L, ask  
a Sony service representative.  
For information on handling lenses, refer to the  
operation guide of the lenses.  
While holding the lens, turn the lens  
mount frame clockwise to secure the  
lens.  
Caution  
Do not leave the camcorder with the lens facing  
the sun. Direct sunlight can enter through the lens,  
be focused in the camcorder, and cause fire.  
Attaching a Lens  
3
Notes  
2
• Turn off the camcorder before attaching/  
removing the lens.  
• The camera interface of the camcorder is set to  
“Type C” for the lenses supplied with the  
PMW-F3K and those having a Cooke  
connector. When attaching a lens with an  
When using an ARRI LDS lens or a Cooke /i lens,  
align the contacts of the lens with the  
corresponding hot shoe of the camcorder.  
1)  
ARRI connector (usable in the future), set the  
interface to “Type A” with “Lens IF” (page  
113) of the CAMERA SET menu. Or set it to  
“Off” for other lenses.  
Hot shoe for Cooke /i lenses  
If the interface setting is not correct, a warning  
message will be displayed when you turn on the  
camcorder.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu  
1)ARRI Group  
Hot shoe for ARRI LDS lenses  
Attaching a Lens  
29  
       
If you have attached an aberration correction  
lens  
Removing the lens  
The aberration correction function is activated  
automatically. Starting the camcorder with an  
aberration correction lens may require more time  
than normally because of data loading at start-up.  
The lenses supplied with the PMW-F3K are  
aberration correction lenses.  
Proceed as follows:  
1
While holding the lens, turn the lens  
mount frame counterclockwise.  
2
Pull the lens forward to remove.  
Note  
Contact a Sony service representative for  
information about other aberration correction  
lenses.  
When another lens is not immediately attached,  
attach the lens mount cap to its original position  
and secure it by turning the lens mount frame  
clockwise.  
Adjusting the flange focal length  
Adjustment of the flange focal length (distance  
between the lens mount attachment plane and the  
imaging plane) is necessary in the following  
situations:  
• The first time a lens is attached  
• When changing lenses  
Using Lens Files  
By your storing the data (such as compensation  
data) specific to the lenses in files, required  
adjustments and compensation can be performed  
merely by retrieving the appropriate file when  
changing lenses.  
• If the focus is not sharp at both telephoto and  
wide angle with a zoom lens  
For details on the lens files, see “Lens Files” on  
The flange focal length for this camcorder can be  
adjusted by rotating the adjustment screw.  
Use an Allen wrench (sized 7/64 inch) for the  
adjustment.  
Counterclockwise rotation lengthens the flange  
focal length and clockwise rotation shortens it.  
Adjustment screw of flange focal length  
S
Attaching a Lens  
30  
       
Cable clamp  
Attaching the  
Microphone  
1
U
R
L
P
2
Two channels (CH-1/CH-2) of audio can be  
recorded (Linear PCM recording) in  
synchronization with video recording.  
Using the Supplied Microphone  
3
Attach the microphone as follows:  
1
2
Loosen the screw of the microphone  
holder and open the cover.  
Connect the white plug of the supplied  
microphone to the CH-1 connector of the  
camcorder and the red plug to the CH-2  
connector.  
2
1
4
Set the LINE/MIC/MIC+48V switches  
(CH-1 and CH-2) to MIC+48V.  
Set the microphone on the holder with  
the UP indication facing up.  
AU  
-1  
D
IO  
C
H
IN  
UP  
M
IC  
LINE  
C
H
-2  
M
IC+48V  
U
L
P
R
M
IC  
LIN  
E
M
IC  
+48V  
LINE/MIC/MIC+48V switch  
5
Set “EXT CH Select” of “Audio Input”  
(page 113) of the AUDIO SET menu to  
“CH-1/CH-2.”  
3
Close the microphone holder cover for  
the original condition to secure, then  
connect the microphone cable to the  
AUDIO IN connectors (CH-1 and CH-  
2) and secure the cable at the cable  
clamp under the holder.  
Note  
Even when recording CH-1 for 2-channel  
monaural by setting “EXT CH Select” of “Audio  
Input” (page 113) of the AUDIO SET menu to  
“CH-1,” set the LINE/MIC/MIC+48V switch for  
CH-2 to the same position as that for CH-1.  
However, if a microphone which supports both  
stereo and monaural modes is connected and  
power of +48 V is supplied to CH-2, the  
microphone is not switched to monaural mode,  
but the directivity goes the left channel side. For  
such a microphone, set the LINE/MIC/MIC+48V  
Attaching the Microphone  
31  
         
switch for CH-1 to MIC+48V and that for CH-2  
to MIC.  
Using the IR Remote  
Commander  
Sony-made microphones which support both  
stereo and monaural modes  
• Microphone supplied with this camcorder  
• ECM-680S  
Before use  
Before you use the supplied IR Remote  
Commander for the first time, pull out the  
insulation sheet from the battery holder.  
Using External Inputs or Optional  
Microphones  
Connect external audio sources or external  
microphones to the AUDIO IN connectors CH-1  
and CH-2, then set the LINE/MIC/MIC+48V  
switches CH-1 and CH-2 to the appropriate  
position.  
Insulation sheet  
LINE: For audio a audio line source (Line level:  
+4 dBu)  
MIC: For a microphone that requires no power  
supply  
MIC+48V: For a microphone that requires +48V  
power supply  
A CR2025 lithium battery is set in the holder at  
the factory.  
To use the IR Remote Commander  
For controlling the camcorder from the IR  
Remote Commander, activate the remote control  
function of the camcorder after turning the power  
on.  
Activating/deactivating the remote control  
function can be achieved using the Setup menu or  
an assignable button.  
To activate using the menu  
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to  
Menu mode, select  
(the OTHERS menu)  
and set “IR Remote” to “On.”  
O
C
THERS  
lock Set  
B
Language  
Assign Button  
Tal l y  
:
Engl i sh  
B
B
B
00:00  
H
ours  
IR  
Bat tery Alar  
M
eter  
O
n
R
e
m
ote  
:
B
Of f  
m
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu  
To activate using an assignable button  
Assigning “IR Remote” to one of the assignable  
buttons permits you to activate/deactivate the  
remote control function by pressing the button.  
For the assignable buttons, see“Changing Functions  
Using the IR Remote Commander  
32  
         
Note  
WARNING  
To avoid malfunctions, the remote control  
function is automatically deactivated when the  
camcorder is turned off. Activate the function  
each time when required after you turn the  
camcorder on.  
• Battery may explode if mistreated.  
Do not recharge, disassemble, or dispose of in  
fire.  
• Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat  
such as sunshine, fire or the like.  
Battery lifetime  
When the lithium battery’s power falls, the IR  
Remote Commander may not work even if you  
press the buttons. The average lithium battery’s  
service life is about one year, but this depends on  
the pattern of use.  
If pressing the remote control buttons produces  
absolutely no effect on the camcorder, replace the  
battery then check the operation again.  
CAUTION  
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly  
replaced. Replace only with the same or  
equivalent type recommended by the  
manufacturer.  
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey  
the law in the relative area or country.  
Replacing the battery in the IR Remote  
Commander  
Use a commercially available CR2025 lithium  
battery. Do not use any battery other than a  
CR2025.  
1
Hold down the lock lever 1, pull out  
the battery holder 2, and remove the  
battery.  
2
1
2
Place a new battery in the battery  
holder with the + symbol facing upward  
1, then push the battery holder into the  
IR Remote Commander until it clicks  
2.  
With the + symbol upward  
1
2
Using the IR Remote Commander  
33  
• Verify the correct direction of insertion before  
use.  
• When storing or carrying this media, put this  
media in the carrying case and lock it firmly.  
Handling SxS Memory  
Cards  
This camcorder records audio and video on SxS  
memory cards (optional) inserted in the card slots.  
About SxS Memory Cards  
Usable SxS memory cards  
• We recommend that you make a backup copy of  
important data. Sony accepts no responsibility  
for any damage or loss of data you recorded.  
• Do not apply a label sheet in places other than  
the label space. When applying the label sheet  
to this media, do not allow it to protrude from its  
proper location.  
Use the following Sony-made SxS memory cards  
(SxS PRO or SxS-1) with this camcorder.  
Operations are not guaranteed with memory cards  
other than SxS PRO and SxS-1.  
SxS PRO  
• SBP-16 (16GB)  
• SBP-32 (32GB)  
SxS-1  
• SBS-32G1A (32GB)  
• SBS-64G1A (64GB)  
Label space  
These cards comply with the ExpressCard  
standard.  
• SxS, SxS PRO and SxS-1 are trademarks of Sony  
Corporation.  
• The ExpressCard word mark and logo are owned by  
Personal Computer Memory Card International  
Association (PCMCIA) and are licensed to Sony  
Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of  
their respective owners.  
• SxS memory cards to be used with this  
camcorder must be formatted using the format  
function of this camcorder. If a card is formatted  
using other device, it is regarded as of a  
different format, requiring repeated format  
operation on this camcorder.  
• Deleting with the function of the camcorder  
does not completely delete data on this media.  
When transferring or disposing of this media,  
use a commercial data deleting software or  
destroy the actual body at you own  
Notes on using SxS memory cards  
• Recorded data may be damaged or lost in the  
following situations:  
responsibility.  
• If the available recording time on a card is short,  
clip operation may be restricted. In such a case,  
delete unnecessary files by using a PC.  
• Remove or reinsert the case card with the case  
opened properly.  
—If you remove this media or turn off the  
power while formatting, reading or writing  
data.  
—If you use this media in locations subject to  
static electricity or electrical noise.  
• Do not use or store this media in the following  
locations:  
—Where recommended operating conditions  
are exceeded.  
—Inside a closed car in summer; or in strong  
sunshine / under direct sunlight / near a  
heater, etc.  
For write protection  
Setting the write-protect switch of the SxS  
memory card to “WP” disables you to record, edit  
or delete data.  
—Humid or corrosive location  
Handling SxS Memory Cards  
34  
         
2
Insert the SxS memory card into the  
slot.  
Write-protect switch  
MENU  
SEL/SET  
CAN  
A
B
PICTURE  
P
Note  
Do not operate the write-protect switch of an SxS  
memory card while it is set in the camcorder.  
Temporarily remove the card from the camcorder  
before changing the switch setting.  
S
L
O
T
S
E
L
E
C
T
O
N
O
FF  
D
C
IN  
With the label facing right  
The access lamp lights in red then changes to  
green once the memory card is ready for use.  
Inserting/Removing an SxS  
Memory Card  
3
Close the cover.  
Status indications by the access lamps  
Card slots A and B are accompanied by the  
respective access lamps to indicate their statuses.  
Lamp  
Slot statuses  
Lights in  
red  
Accessing the loaded SxS memory card  
(writing/reading data)  
Lights in  
green  
Standby (ready for recording or  
playback using the loaded SxS memory  
card)  
Off  
• No SxS memory card is loaded.  
• The loaded card is invalid.  
• An SxS memory card is loaded, but  
another slot is active.  
A
B
Access lamps  
Removing an SxS memory card  
1
Open the cover, once press the eject  
button to release the lock, then pull the  
button out.  
Card slots  
Eject buttons  
MENU  
SLOT SELECT  
ON OFF  
SEL/SET  
CAN  
A
B
PICTURE  
P
SLOT SELECT button  
Cover  
Inserting an SxS memory card  
S
L
O
T
S
E
L
E
C
T
O
N
1
Open the cover.  
O
FF  
D
C
IN  
Press and unlock the button.  
Handling SxS Memory Cards  
35  
             
2
Press the eject button again to remove  
the card.  
Note on formatting  
Any SxS memory card formatted with a device  
other than this camcorder cannot be used with the  
camcorder.  
MENU  
SEL/SET  
CAN  
A
B
PICTURE  
P
To execute formatting  
Using “Format Media” (page 130) of the  
OTHERS menu, specify “Media(A)” (slot  
A) or “Media(B)” (slot B) then select  
“Execute.” On a confirmation message,  
select “Execute” again.  
2
T 1  
SLO  
SELECT  
O
N
O
F
F
D
C
IN  
Formatting begins.  
The in-progress message and status bar (%) are  
displayed, and the access lamp lights in red.  
When formatting is completed, the completion  
message is displayed for three seconds.  
Notes  
• Data are not guaranteed if the power is turned  
off or a memory card is removed while the card  
is being accessed. All data on the card may be  
destroyed. Be sure that the access lamps are lit  
in green or off when you turn off the power or  
remove memory cards.  
• Fully insert the memory card in the card slot. If  
it is inserted halfway, the eject button may not  
function properly.  
Recording/playback during formatting  
You can perform recording or playback using the  
SxS memory card in the other card slot while  
formatting is in progress.  
If formatting fails  
A write-protected SxS memory card or memory  
card that cannot be used with this camcorder will  
not be formatted.  
Switching Between SxS Memory  
Cards  
As a warning message is displayed, replace the  
card with an appropriate SxS memory card, as per  
the instructions in the message.  
When SxS memory cards are loaded in both card  
slots A and B, press the SLOT SELECT button to  
select the card you wish to use.  
If a card becomes full during recording, switching  
to the other card is automatically executed.  
Notes  
• All the data, including recorded pictures and  
setup files, are erased when a memory card is  
formatted.  
• SxS memory cards to be used with this  
camcorder must be formatted using the format  
function of this camcorder. Any card formatted  
with other device must be formatted again with  
this camcorder.  
Note  
The SLOT SELECT button is disabled while  
playback is in progress. Switching is not executed  
even if you press the button. The button is enabled  
on the thumbnail screen (page 85).  
Checking the Remaining Time  
Available for Recording  
Formatting an SxS Memory Card  
Formatting may be required before using an SxS  
memory card with this camcorder. For an SxS  
memory card that is not formatted or that was  
formatted with another system, the message  
“Unsupported File System” is displayed on the  
LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.  
In E-E Display/Recording mode, you can check  
the time remaining for the SxS memory cards  
loaded in the card slots on the LCD monitor/  
viewfinder screen.  
Format the card as instructed below.  
Handling SxS Memory Cards  
36  
             
When restoration is completed, the completion  
message is displayed for three seconds.  
120min
A: 25min  
B: 50min  
Z99  
STBY  
T
If restoration fails  
• A write-protected SxS memory card or one on  
which an error occurred cannot be restored. For  
such a card, a warning message is displayed.  
Release the write protection or replace the card,  
as per the instructions in the message.  
• An SxS memory card on which an error  
occurred may become usable again through  
repeated formatting.  
• In some cases, only parts of clips cannot be  
restored. Playback of the restored clips becomes  
possible again.  
• The following operation may restore an SxS  
memory card for which the message “Could not  
Restore Some Clips” is repeatedly displayed  
each time you try the restoration process:  
The available time for recording with the current  
video format (recording bit rate) is calculated  
according to the remaining space of each card and  
displayed in time units of minutes.  
The remaining can also be checked in a meter  
format on the BATTERY/MEDIA status screen  
Note  
A
icon appears if the memory card is write-  
protected.  
Replacing an SxS memory card  
• If the available time on two cards in total  
becomes less than 5 minutes, a message “Media  
Near Full,” flashing of the tally lamps, and a  
beep sound will warn you. Replace the cards  
with those with sufficient space.  
• If you continue recording until the total  
remaining time reaches zero, the message  
changes to “Media Full,” and recording stops.  
1 Copy necessary clips to another SxS memory  
card, using the copy function (page 95) of the  
camcorder or the dedicated application  
software (supplied) (page 137).  
2 Format the problem SxS memory card, using  
the format function of this camcorder.  
3 Return the necessary clips to the SxS  
memory card by copy operation.  
Note  
Recording/playback during restoration  
You can perform recording or playback using the  
SxS memory card in the other card slot while  
restoration is in progress.  
Approximately 600 clips can be recorded on one  
SxS memory card at maximum.  
If the number of recorded clips reaches the limit,  
the remaining time indication becomes “0,” and  
the message “Media Full” is displayed.  
Note  
For restoration of media recorded with this unit,  
be sure to use this unit. Media recorded with a  
device other than this unit or with another unit of  
different version (even of the same model) may  
not be restored using this unit.  
Restoring an SxS Memory Card  
If an error occurs with data in a memory card for  
some reason, the card must be restored.  
If an SxS memory card that needs to be restored  
is loaded, a message that prompts you to execute  
a restore operation is displayed on the LCD  
monitor/viewfinder screen.  
To restore a card  
Select “Execute” by turning the jog dial  
then press the dial.  
The restore operation begins.  
During restoration, the in-progress message and  
status bar (%) are displayed, and the access lamp  
is lit in red.  
Handling SxS Memory Cards  
37  
         
Recording  
Basic Operation Procedure  
Basic recording can be performed with the  
following procedures:  
8
To stop recording, press the REC  
START/STOP button again.  
(If you are using the IR Remote Commander, press  
the REC PAUSE button simultaneously with the  
unmarked button.)  
Preparations  
Recording stops and the camcorder enters  
STBY (recording standby) mode.  
1
2
Mount a fully charged battery pack.  
Load SxS memory card(s).  
Note  
If you load two cards, recording is continued  
by automatically switching to the second  
card when the first card becomes full.  
If you press the REC START/STOP button to  
start next recording while previous data writing is  
not completed, the message “Cannot Proceed”  
may be displayed and recording may not start.  
3
4
Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor for  
the best view.  
To record external input signals  
Changing the “Input Source Select” setting of the  
VIDEO SET menu from “Camera” (factory  
setting) to “i.LINK” enables recording of an HDV  
stream fed via the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector.  
When you wish to use the viewfinder, fold  
the LCD monitor to its park position and  
adjust the angle of the viewfinder.  
Set the power switch to ON.  
The camcorder is turned on.  
To prevent a switching error  
When using the Remote Commander, activate the remote  
control mode (page 32).  
The REC START/STOP button on the handle is  
incorporated with a protective cover. If the REC  
START/STOP button on the handle will not be  
used, it is recommended to cover the button.  
Note  
When you hold the camcorder by the grip,  
support it from underneath with your left hand.  
Checking the last recorded clip (Rec  
Review)  
Recording  
9
Press the REC REVIEW button.  
5
Adjust the iris, gain, electric shutter,  
and white balance, as required.  
The Rec Review function (page 60) is  
activated, and the last recorded clip is played  
back for the specified time on the LCD  
monitor/viewfinder screen.  
When playback reaches the end of the clip,  
the camcorder returns to STBY (recording  
standby) mode.  
6
7
Focus on the subject.  
Press the REC START/STOP button on  
the handle or the grip.  
(If you are using the IR Remote Commander, press  
the REC button simultaneously with the unmarked  
button.)  
To delete clips  
You can delete the last recorded clip by using the  
Last Clip DEL function.  
The front and rear tally lamps light and  
Use the All Clips DEL function when you wish to  
delete all recorded clips from a memory card.  
recording begins.  
Basic Operation Procedure  
38  
               
Note  
If copying is done using Explorer (Windows)  
or Finder (MAC), the continuity and  
relationships of recorded materials may not be  
maintained.  
To specify a clip to be deleted, use the thumbnail  
screen.  
Maximum duration of a clip  
Clip (recording data)  
In HD mode, a clip can be 24 hours long at  
maximum. If a clip exceeds 24 hours, it is  
automatically divided.  
When you stop recording, video, audio and  
subsidiary data from the start to end of the  
recording are recorded as a single clip on an  
SxS memory card.  
Clip name  
For each clip recorded with this camcorder, a  
clip name is automatically generated according  
to the method selected with “Auto Naming”  
(page 127) under “Clip” of the OTHERS menu.  
The default setting of “Auto Naming” is “Plan,”  
with which a clip name defined in planning  
metadata is applied.  
Change the “Auto Naming” setting to “Title” to  
apply a clip name composed of 4 to 46  
alphanumerics and 4 numerics.  
Example: ABCD0001  
The block of 4 to 46 alphanumerics can be  
specified as desired using “Clip” of the  
OTHERS menu before you start recording. (It  
cannot be changed after recording.)  
The value of the 4 numerics is automatically  
counted up in sequence.  
Notes on Clips  
The XDCAM EX-series products limit the  
maximum file size of an HD clip to 4GB and  
that of an SD clip to 2GB. If you continue  
recording for an extended period, recorded  
materials may be segmented into multiple files,  
depending on the file size (the maximum  
number of partitions is 99). The camcorder  
regards continuous recording as one clip even if  
it has been segmented into multiple files.  
A long clip can be recorded crossing over two  
memory cards in slot A and B.  
When you copy clips to a hard disk drive, etc.  
using a computer, it is recommended to use the  
dedicated application software on the supplied  
CD-ROM.  
Basic Operation Procedure  
39  
     
Format  
Indication on this  
camcorder  
Selecting the Video  
Format  
HQ 1920 × 1080  
23.98 Progressive  
HQ 1440 × 1080  
23.98 Progressive  
HQ 1920/23.98P  
HQ 1440/23.98P  
SP 1440/23.98P  
HQ 1280/59.94i  
HQ 1280/29.97P  
HQ 1280/23.98P  
You can select various video formats for  
recording/playback using “System” of the  
OTHERS menu.  
The current format is displayed on the screen  
when you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO  
button.  
SP 1440 × 1080  
23.98 Progressive  
HQ 1280 × 720  
59.94 Progressive  
HQ 1280 × 720  
29.97 Progressive  
HQ 1280 × 720  
23.98 Progressive  
Q REC  
TCG 00:00:00:00  
HQ  
1920/59.94i  
S&Q Motion  
With “PAL Area” selected  
Format  
Indication on this  
camcorder  
HQ 1920 × 1080  
50 interlace  
HQ 1920/50i  
Selectable Formats  
HQ 1440 × 1080  
50 interlace  
HQ 1440/50i  
SP 1440/50i  
HQ 1920/25P  
HQ 1440/25P  
HQ 1280/50P  
HQ 1280/25P  
The selectable formats vary depending on HD/SD  
setting and the area of use (NTSC or PAL).  
SP 1440 × 1080  
50 interlace  
Selection of the area of use is achieved on the Initial  
Setting display (page 24) or using “System” (page  
126) of the OTHERS menu.  
HQ 1920 × 1080  
25 Progressive  
HQ 1440 × 1080  
25 Progressive  
HQ 1280 × 720  
50 Progressive  
HD mode  
When the camcorder is set to HD mode, the video  
formats set on this camcorder cover the recording  
bit rate (HQ/SP), recording picture size  
(horizontal resolution), recording frame rate, and  
recording scan system (i/P).  
HQ 1280 × 720  
25 Progressive  
SD mode (DVCAM mode)  
When you select an HQ format, recording is made  
with the bit rate of 35 Mbps VBR.  
When you select an SP format, recording is made  
with the HDV-compatible bit rate of 25 Mbps  
CBR.  
When the camcorder is set to SD mode, the video  
formats set on this camcorder cover the recording  
frame rate, recording scan system (i/P), and  
aspect (SQ/EC).  
When you select SD mode, recording is made  
with the bit rate of 25 Mbps CBR.  
With “NTSC Area” or “NTSC(J) Area” selected  
With “NTSC Area” or “NTSC(J) Area” selected  
Format  
Indication on this  
camcorder  
HQ 1920/59.94i  
Format  
Indication on this  
camcorder  
HQ 1920 × 1080  
59.94 interlace  
HQ 1440 × 1080  
59.94 interlace  
SP 1440 × 1080  
59.94 interlace  
720 × 480  
DVCAM59.94i SQ  
HQ 1440/59.94i  
SP 1440/59.94i  
HQ 1920/29.97P  
HQ 1440/29.97P  
59.94 interlace, squeeze  
720 × 480  
59.94 interlace, edge crop  
720 × 480  
DVCAM59.94i EC  
DVCAM29.97P SQ  
DVCAM29.97P EC  
HQ 1920 × 1080  
29.97 Progressive  
HQ 1440 × 1080  
29.97 Progressive  
29.97 Progressive, squeeze  
720 × 480  
29.97 Progressive, edge crop  
Selecting the Video Format  
40  
         
With “PAL Area” selected  
For the menu items “Format” of “System” of the  
OTHERS menu and “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O  
Select” of the VIDEO SET menu the settings for  
HD mode and those for SD mode are  
independently stored in memory. When you  
switch between HD and SD, these items are  
automatically changed to the conditions  
corresponding to the selected mode.  
Format  
Indication on this  
camcorder  
DVCAM50i SQ  
720 × 576  
50 interlace, squeeze  
720 × 576  
50 interlace, edge crop  
DVCAM50i EC  
DVCAM25P SQ  
DVCAM25P EC  
720 × 576  
25 Progressive, squeeze  
720 × 576  
25 Progressive, edge crop  
Changing the Format  
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to  
Menu mode, display the OTHERS menu with  
, and select “Format” from “System.”  
Switching between HD and SD  
For HD/SD switching use “HD/SD” under  
“System” of the OTHERS menu.  
When you change the menu setting, the  
camcorder automatically restarts, executing the  
switching.  
O
THERS  
IR ot  
at tery  
Battery  
enlock  
Tr i gger  
Re  
m
e
:
Of f  
HQ 1920/59.94i  
HQ 1440/59.94i  
SP 1440/59.94i  
B
A
lar  
m
B
B
B
:
I
NFO  
G
HQ 1920/29.97P  
00:00  
Mode  
Both  
C
ountry : HQ 1440/29.97P  
S
C
yste  
l i p  
m
B
HD  
For  
/
SD  
at  
:
:
HQ 1920/23.98P  
HQ 1440/23.98P  
Note  
B
m
HD/SD switching is disabled during recording  
and playback.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu  
1
Press the MENU button to set the  
camcorder to Menu mode, display the  
Signals from the SDI OUT, VIDEO OUT, and  
HDMI OUT connectors are also output according  
to the format selected with this menu.  
OTHERS menu with  
, and select  
“HD/SD” from “System.”  
For details on the output formats, refer to the  
Supplement in the supplied CD-ROM labeled  
“Manuals for Solid-State Memory Camcorder.”  
O
THERS  
IR ot  
at tery  
Battery  
enlock  
Tr i gger  
Rem  
e
:
Of f  
B
A
lar  
m
B
B
B
:
I
NFO  
G
00:00  
(
)
Mode  
Both  
C
HD  
For  
ountry : NTSC  
J
Area  
Note on recording format in SP 1440/23.98P  
mode  
S
C
yste  
l i p  
m
B
/
SD  
at  
:
:
HD  
HQ 1920/59.94i  
B
m
When recording in SP 1440 × 1080 mode at  
23.98P in Progressive mode (indicated as SP  
1440/23.98P on this camcorder), pictures are  
recorded at 59.94 in Interlace mode (indicated as  
SP 1440/59.94i) by pull-down processing.  
2
Select the desired mode.  
A confirmation message is displayed.  
Change Mode?  
HD > SD  
Execute  
C
ancel  
3
Select “Execute.”  
The camcorder is automatically turned off,  
then is restarted, activating the menu setting.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu  
Selecting the Video Format  
41  
     
Switching the ND Filters  
Using the 5600K CC  
Filter  
ND filters are available for keeping the aperture  
in a proper range.  
Set the ND FILTER switch according to the  
brightness of the subject.  
When you press the 5600K CC button, the  
indicator lights and the 5600K CC (electric color  
compensation) filter is activated.  
5600K CC  
5600K CC button with indicator  
ND FILTER  
2
The “5600K CC” indication is displayed on the  
screen when you press the DISPLAY/BATT  
INFO button.  
1
OFF  
ND FILTER switch  
5600K CC  
ND1  
1
2:  
/
ND  
64  
TLCS  
.
1
1: / ND  
8
OFF: Clear  
Note  
The 5600K CC On/Off setting cannot be changed  
while auto white-balance adjustment or auto  
black-balance adjustment is in progress or when  
the white-balance adjustment is set to ATW  
mode.  
The ND filter number is displayed on the screen  
when you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO  
button.  
5600K CC  
ND1  
TLCS  
.
1
1.5  
2
3
4
++  
ATW 4300K PPOFF  
T1.6  
Note  
No indication is obtained if the ND FILTER  
switch is set to OFF.  
Switching the ND Filters / Using the 5600K CC Filter  
42  
               
To the B position of the WHITE BALANCE  
switch, ATW mode is assigned at the factory. The  
setting can be changed with “White Switch <B>”  
(page 112) of the CAMERA SET menu to select  
Memory B mode.  
Adjusting the White  
Balance  
The white balance must be adjusted to suit to the  
color temperature of the light source.  
You can select the adjustment mode according to  
the shooting conditions.  
Preset mode  
The color temperature is adjusted to the preset  
value (factory setting: 3200K) in this mode.  
Select this mode when there is no time to adjust  
the white balance or when you wish to fix the  
white balance to the condition of you set for a  
Picture Profile.  
WHITE  
GAIN  
L
BALANCE  
ATW  
B
M
A
PRST  
H
Memory A mode, Memory B mode  
WHITE BALANCE switch  
• The white balance is adjusted to the value stored  
in memory A or memory B.  
• Pressing the AUTO WHT BAL button executes  
auto white balance and stores the adjusted value  
in memory A or memory B.  
B: ATW or Memory B mode  
A: Memory A mode  
PRST: Preset mode  
Assigning the ATW on/off function to an  
assignable button permits you to independently  
activate/deactivate ATW.  
ATW (Auto-Tracing White balance) mode  
In this mode, the camcorder automatically adjusts  
the white balance to the appropriate condition.  
When the color temperature of the light source  
changes, the white balance adjustment is  
automatically executed.  
Five steps of adjustment speed can be selected  
with “ATW Speed” (page 112) of the CAMERA  
SET menu.  
For details on the assignable buttons, see “Changing  
When you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO  
button, the current adjustment mode and color  
temperature are displayed on the screen.  
TLCS  
.
Holding the ATW value  
When the ATW Hold function is assigned to an  
assignable button, you can momentarily hold the  
ATW value to fix the white balance, even in  
ATW mode, by pressing the button.  
1
1.5  
2
3
4
++  
ATW 4300K PPOFF  
T1.6  
ATW: ATW mode  
W:A: Memory A mode  
W:B: Memory B mode  
W:P: Preset mode  
For details on the assignable buttons, see “Changing  
Selecting the Adjustment Mode  
Executing Auto White Balance  
You can select Preset mode, Memory A mode, or  
ATW (Memory B) mode with the WHITE  
BALANCE switch.  
Execute auto white-balance adjustment according  
to the color temperature of the light source.  
The adjustment value can be stored in memory A  
or B.  
Adjusting the White Balance  
43  
                     
• When you execute the adjustment in a memory  
mode, the adjusted value is stored in memory  
(A or B) selected in step 1.  
Note  
Auto white-balance adjustment cannot be  
executed in Preset mode.  
• When you execute the adjustment in ATW  
mode, adjustment in ATW is resumed.  
1
To store the adjustment value in  
memory, select Memory A or Memory  
B mode.  
If auto white-balance adjustment fails  
An error message is displayed on the screen for  
approximately three seconds.  
2
3
Select the appropriate ND filter  
according to the lighting condition.  
If the error message is displayed, try auto white-  
balance adjustment again.  
If the error message continues to be displayed  
after several attempts, consult your Sony service  
representative.  
Place a white subject under the same  
lighting condition and shoot it so that a  
white area is obtained on the screen.  
A white object (white cloth, a white wall,  
etc.) near the subject may be used in place.  
Be careful not to have any spots of high  
illumination on the screen.  
4
5
Adjust the lens iris opening.  
Set it to the proper condition if the manual  
iris adjustment mode is selected.  
Press the AUTO WHT BAL button.  
Auto white-balance adjustment begins.  
ASSIGN 4  
AUTO  
WHT BAL  
AUTO WHT BAL button  
During adjustment, an in-progress message is  
displayed on the screen. When the adjustment is  
completed successfully, the message changes to a  
completion message, and the obtained color  
temperature is displayed.  
Adjusting the White Balance  
44  
 
Adjusting the Black  
Balance  
Displaying the Markers  
and Zebra Patterns  
With this camcorder, you can adjust the black  
balance using the menu.  
Use the CAMERA SET menu for the adjustment.  
During recording, various markers and zebra  
patterns can be inserted into the image on the  
LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.  
This does not affect recording signals.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu  
Displaying the Markers  
1
2
Close the iris.  
When using a lens on which the iris can be  
closed, such as the lens supplied with the  
PMW-F3K, close the iris.  
If a lens on which the iris cannot be  
completely closed is used, cover the lens  
entirely with the lens cap or equivalent.  
Use “Marker” of the LCD/VF SET menu.  
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to  
Menu mode, display the LCD/VF SET menu with  
, and select “Marker” from the menu.  
LCD/VF SET  
Press the MENU button to set the  
camcorder to Menu mode, display the  
CAMERA SET menu with  
select “Auto Black Bal.” from the menu.  
B
LCD  
VF  
Peaking  
Set t i ng  
Safet y Zone  
Safet y Area  
:
:
O
O
n
n
B
B
B
B
B
: 90%  
:
:
, and  
00:00  
Marker  
Center  
Aspect  
M
M
arker  
arker  
On  
Zebra  
Display  
O
f f  
On/  
O
f f  
Aspect Select  
: 4 : 3  
C
A
M
E
R
A SET  
lack  
Execute  
Cancel  
A
uto  
B
Bal.  
Activating the marker indications  
B
B
B
:
Gain Setup  
Shut ter  
• Set “Setting” to “On” then turn the markers on/  
off independently.  
No marker is displayed when “Setting” is “Off.”  
• Assigning the Marker on/off function to one of  
the assignable buttons permits you to operate  
“Setting: On/Off” by pressing the button.  
00:00  
S
lo  
Color  
F l i cker Reduce  
w
S
hutter  
B
ar ype  
T
Mul t i  
B
3
Select “Execute” to start the black  
balance adjustment.  
For the assignable buttons, see “Changing  
During adjustment, an in-progress message is  
displayed. When the adjustment is completed  
successfully, the message changes to a  
completion message.  
Displaying the safety-zone marker  
Set “Safety Zone” to “On” to insert the safety-  
zone marker to the screen.  
With “Safety Area” you can select the size of the  
safety-zone marker from among 80%, 90%,  
92.5%, and 95% of the picture area.  
Adjusting the Black Balance / Displaying the Markers and Zebra Patterns  
45  
             
Example: 95%  
Displaying the guide frame lines  
120min  
STBY  
TCG 00:00:00:00  
Set “Guide Frame” to “On” to insert the guide  
frame lines into the screen area.  
120min  
STBY  
TCG 00:00:00:00  
When the aspect marker is on, the safety zone  
marker shows the effective area within the aspect  
marker.  
Displaying the center marker  
Displaying the Zebra Patterns  
Set “Center Marker” to “On” to insert the center  
marker into the screen area.  
A zebra pattern(s) can be inserted to the picture  
on the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen to check  
the appropriate luminance level.  
120min  
STBY  
TCG 00:00:00:00  
Factory-set zebras  
1 (70%)  
2 (100%)  
Displaying the aspect marker  
Set “Aspect Marker” to “Line” or “Mask” to  
insert the aspect marker into the screen area.  
Line: To show as white lines  
Mask: To display by lowering the video signal  
level of areas outside the marker range  
You can select the ratio of the aspect marker from  
among 4:3, 13:9, 14:9, 15:9, 1.66:1, 1.85:1,  
2.35:1, and 2.4:1 with “Aspect Select.”  
Example: 4:3  
120min  
STBY  
TCG 00:00:00:00  
When you set “Aspect Marker” to “Mask,” you  
can also change the brightness of images outside  
the aspect marker with “Aspect Mask.” It can be  
selected in the range of 0% to 90% (10% steps).  
Note  
No aspect marker is displayed when a video  
format of EC (Edge Crop) is selected in SD mode.  
Displaying the Markers and Zebra Patterns  
46  
               
Turning the zebra-pattern indication on/  
off  
Setting the Gain  
Pressing the ZEBRA button turns the zebra-  
pattern indication on/off.  
You can set the gain of the video amplifier  
according to the brightness of the subject.  
Select the setting mode required by the shooting  
conditions.  
Fixed gain mode (manual gain  
adjustment)  
Select the gain of the video amplifier, using the  
switch or a menu operation.  
AGC mode (automatic gain control)  
The gain of the video amplifier is automatically  
adjusted according to the picture brightness.  
TE  
NCE  
ZEBRA PEAKING  
B
A
PRST  
Recording With Fixed Gain  
ZEBRA button  
Selecting the gain with the switch  
Select the gain, using the GAIN switch.  
Note  
Changing the zebra pattern  
Using “Zebra” of the LCD/VF SET menu, you  
can change the zebra pattern to be displayed.  
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to  
Menu mode, display the LCD/VF SET menu with  
, and select “Zebra” from the menu.  
When AGC mode is on, the fixed gain cannot be  
selected.  
LCD/VF SET  
B
LCD  
B
VF  
B
Peaking  
00:00  
B
Marker  
B
B
Zebra  
Display  
Zebra Select : 1  
Zebra1 Level : 70  
On/Of f  
Zebra Select  
Select the zebra pattern(s) to be displayed.  
1 (Zebra1): To display a zebra pattern in the area  
of 10% centering the video level set with  
“Zebra1 Level.”  
2 (Zebra2): To display a zebra pattern for the  
video level over 100%.  
WHITE  
GAIN BALANCE  
L
M
H
ATW  
B
A
PRST  
Both: To display both Zebra1 and Zebra2.  
GAIN switch  
Zebra1 Level  
Set the center level of Zebra1 in the range of 50 to  
107%. The default setting is 70%.  
The gain value at each of the switch positions are  
set at the factory are as follows:  
Setting the Gain  
47  
                     
L: 0 dB  
M: 6 dB  
H: 12 dB  
Setting the Electronic  
Shutter  
These values can be changed in the range of  
–3 dB to +18 dB, using the CAMERA SET menu.  
To change  
The electronic shutter of the camcorder permits  
you to change the shutter speed (the accumulation  
time per recording frame).  
The electronic shutter can be adjusted  
automatically or manually as required.  
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to  
Menu mode, display the CAMERA SET menu  
with  
menu.  
, and select “Gain Setup” from the  
CA  
MERA  
SET  
Auto Shutter mode  
A
uto  
B
lack  
B
al.  
Low  
Mid  
High : 12dB  
:
:
0dB  
6dB  
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted  
according to the picture brightness.  
B
B
B
:
Gain Setup  
Shut ter  
00:00  
S
lo  
Color  
F l i cker Reduce  
w
S
B
hutter  
ar ype  
T
Mul t i  
B
Fixed Shutter (manual adjustment)  
modes  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu  
Recording is made with a specified shutter speed  
(accumulation time).  
Standard modes (Speed mode/Angle mode)  
These modes may be especially effective when  
you wish to record a quick-moving subject with  
little blurring.  
When you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO  
button, the current gain value is displayed on the  
screen.  
TLCS  
.
You can select Speed mode or Angle mode. In  
Angle mode, you can specify the shutter speed by  
setting the shutter angle.  
1
1.5  
2
3
4
5
7
10  
++  
ATW 4300K PPOFF  
T1.6 18dB  
S
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode  
Specify the shutter speed by frequency. This  
mode may be used to shoot the monitor screen  
eliminating horizontal bands.  
The indication in dB can be changed to that in an  
ISO value by changing the “Gain Setting” of  
“Display On/Off” (page 119) of the LCD/VF  
SET menu.  
Slow Shutter mode  
TLCS  
.
The shutter speed is specified in the number of  
accumulated frames.  
1
1.5  
2
3
4
5
7
10  
++  
ATW 4300K PPOFF  
T1.6 ISO:6400  
Shooting in Auto Shutter Mode  
Recording in AGC Mode  
You can turn Auto Shutter mode on by setting  
“Auto Shutter” to “On” with “TLCS” (page 112)  
of the CAMERA SET menu.  
You can turn AGC mode on by setting “AGC” to  
“On” with “TLCS” (page 112) of the CAMERA  
SET menu.  
Shooting in a Fixed Shutter Mode  
When you set the SHUTTER switch to ON, the  
fixed shutter is turned on in the mode and with the  
shutter speed you specified with “Shutter” of the  
CAMERA SET menu.  
Setting the Electronic Shutter  
48  
                               
Note  
Frame rate Shutter speed (sec.)  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
25P  
/
/
/
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
,
When Auto Shutter mode is On, the fixed shutter  
cannot be selected.  
33 50 60 100 120 125 250  
1
1
1
,
/
,
/
500 1000 2000  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
29.97P  
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
40 50 60 100 120 125 250  
1
1
,
/
,
/
500 1000 2000  
Angle (standard angle) mode  
Set “Mode” to “Angle,” and specify the shutter  
angle with “Shutter Angle.”  
You can select from among 11.25º, 22.5º, 45º,  
72º, 86.4º, 90º, 144º, 150º, 172.8º, 180º, and  
216.0º.  
Note  
When the frame rate is set to a value in the range  
of 1 to 16 in Slow & Quick Motion mode, you  
cannot select 72º, 86.4º, 144º, 150º, 172.8º, or  
216.0º.  
SHUTTER  
OFF  
ON  
SHUTTER switch  
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode  
Set “Mode” to “ECS,” and specify the frequency  
with “ECS Frequency.”  
The available setting values vary depending on  
the current frame rate.  
Setting the shutter mode and speed  
The shutter mode and shutter speed can be set  
with the CAMERA SET menu.  
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to  
Menu mode, display the CAMERA SET menu  
When you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO  
button, the current shutter mode and the set value  
are displayed.  
with  
, and select “Shutter.”  
CA  
ME  
RA  
SET  
A
uto  
B
lack  
B
al.  
Mode  
:
Speed  
B
B
B
:
5
7
10 15 20 30  
oo  
m
Gain Setup  
Shut ter  
Shut ter Speed: 1/125  
Shut ter Angle : 180  
ECS Frequency : 60.02  
O
18dB SHT:1/2000 CH1  
CH2  
00:00  
S
lo  
Color  
F l i cker Reduce  
w
S
hutter  
B
ar ype  
T
Mul t i  
B
Shooting in Slow Shutter Mode  
Speed (standard speed) mode  
Set “Mode” to “Speed,” and specify the time  
([ 1/setting value ] sec.) with “Shutter Speed.”  
The available setting values vary depending on  
the current frame rate.  
Select “Slow Shutter” from the CAMERA SET  
menu.  
CA  
MERA  
SET  
A
uto  
B
lack  
Bal.  
Frame rate Shutter speed (sec.)  
B
B
B
:
Gain Setup  
Shut ter  
1
1
1
1
1
1
59.94i,  
59.94P  
50i, 50P  
23.98P  
/
/
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
60, 100 120 125 250 500  
1
Set t ing  
Nu ber of  
:
Of f  
00:00  
S
lo  
Color  
F l i cker Reduce  
w
S
B
hutter  
ar ype  
m
Frames : 16  
1
,
/
1000 2000  
T
Mul t i  
B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
/
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
32 48 50 60 96 100 120  
1
1
1
1
,
/
,
/
,
/
,
/
125 250 500 1000 2000  
Set “Setting” to “On,” and specify the number of  
accumulated frames with “Number of Frames.”  
You can select in the range of 2 to 8 frames.  
Setting the Electronic Shutter  
49  
         
Notes  
• Slow Shutter cannot be used when the video  
format is SP 1440/23.98P, the camcorder is in  
Slow & Quick Motion mode, or “Auto Shutter”  
is “On.”  
Adjusting the Iris  
• When a format of the interlace system is  
selected, the Slow Shutter On/Off setting  
cannot be changed in the following conditions:  
—Recording is in progress.  
Adjust the iris opening using the iris ring of the  
lens according to the brightness of the subject.  
For operations of the lens, refer to the operation  
guide of the lens.  
—Cache Rec is On.  
—A setting which includes “HDV” or  
“DVCAM” is selected with “SDI/HDMI/  
i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET  
menu.  
For lens which supports the iris position  
indication, the current setting is displayed on the  
screen when you press the DISPLAY/BATT  
INFO button.  
TLCS  
.
1
1.5  
2
3
4
5
7
10  
M
F
++  
T1.6 18dB  
ATW 4300K PPOFF  
When the “TLCS” (total level control) setting of  
the CAMERA SET menu has been changed, the  
current setting is indicated with a symbol before  
the iris value.  
++: Approx. one stop further open  
+: Approx. half a stop further open  
No symbol: Standard  
: Approx. half a stop further closed  
– –: Approx. one stop further closed  
For details on TLCS, see “TLCS” (page 112) in  
“Setup Menu List.”  
Adjusting the Iris  
50  
     
Adjusting the Zoom  
Adjusting the Focus  
When using a zoom lens, rotate the zoom ring of  
the lens to adjust the zoom.  
Rotate the focus ring of the lens for the best focus  
while observing the picture on the LCD monitor/  
viewfinder screen.  
For operations of the lens, refer to the operation  
guide of the lens.  
For operations of the lens, refer to the operation  
guide of the lens.  
For a lens which supports the zoom position  
indication, the current zoom position is displayed  
on the screen in the range of 0 (Wide) to 99 (Tele)  
when you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO  
button.  
Expanded Focus  
When you press the EXPANDED FOCUS  
button, the center area of the picture is magnified  
on the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen, making  
the focus adjustment easier.  
Press the EXPANDED FOCUS button again or  
leave the focus ring unmoved for 5 seconds to  
resume the normal angle for recording.  
120min STBY  
A: 60min  
S&Q  
B: 120min  
Z99  
EXPANDED FOCUS button  
The numerical indication can be changed to that  
in a bar by changing the “Zoom Position” setting  
of “Display On/Off” (page 119) of the LCD/VF  
SET menu.  
REC REVIEW  
EXPANDED  
FOCUS  
W
120min STBY  
A: 60min  
S&Q  
B: 120min  
W
T
Peaking  
When you press the PEAKING button, the  
peaking function is activated. This function  
emphasizes the contours of the images on the  
LCD monitor/viewfinder screen, making manual  
focusing easier.  
This function does not affect recording signals.  
Adjusting the Zoom / Adjusting the Focus  
51  
               
The emphasis level and color of the contours can  
be set with “Peaking” (page 117) of the LCD/VF  
SET menu.  
Reducing Flickers  
To reduce flickers, try either of the following two  
methods:  
Setting the shutter speed according to  
the power-supply frequency  
Activate the electronic shutter (page 48) and set  
the shutter speed according to the power supply  
frequency.  
When the frequency is 50 Hz  
1
1
Set the shutter speed to  
/
or /  
seconds.  
seconds.  
50  
100  
120  
TE  
When the frequency is 60 Hz  
NCE  
ZEBRA PEAKING  
1
1
B
A
Set the shutter speed to  
/
or /  
60  
PRST  
Using the Flicker-Reduction function  
PEAKING button  
Set “Mode” of “Flicker Reduce” (page 111) of  
the CAMERA SET menu to “Auto” or “On” and  
set “Frequency” to the power-supply frequency  
(50 Hz or 60 Hz).  
Note  
If the frame rate selected for recording is close to  
the power-supply frequency, flicker may not be  
reduced sufficiently even if you activate the  
Flicker-Reduction function. In such cases, use the  
electronic shutter.  
Recommended settings for flicker reduction  
Frequency  
Always set “Frequency” to the power-supply  
frequency value appropriate for the shooting area.  
Mode  
• It is recommended to set “Mode” to “Off” when  
shooting outdoors or under lighting that does  
not cause flicker. (It can be also “Auto,” but the  
compensation may not be done properly.)  
• It is recommended to set “Mode” to “Auto”  
when shooting indoors or under various lighting  
that may cause flicker, such as fluorescent,  
sodium, or mercury-vapor lamps. (If  
continuously shooting under lighting that may  
cause flicker, “Mode” should be set to “On.”)  
Reducing Flickers  
52  
     
The recommended “Mode” settings are shown  
below.  
Setting the Time Data  
Flicker  
Reduce/  
Mode  
Environments  
Under lighting Under lighting  
that may cause that does not  
flicker  
Recommended  
cause flicker  
Acceptable  
Time data, such as the timecodes, user bits, and  
the clock time, are recorded with pictures.  
Auto  
On  
Acceptable  
Not recommended  
Recommended  
Off  
Not recommended  
Running Modes of the Timecode  
Note  
The flicker-reduction function does not operate  
when signals are being fed from the HD SDI A/B  
(Dual-Link) connectors.  
For the timecode, three running modes and Clock  
mode can be selected.  
Rec Run mode  
The timecode advances during recording only.  
The continuity of the timecode is maintained  
between clips in the sequence of recording as long  
as the SxS memory card is not changed.  
If you remove the memory card and record on  
another card, the timecode will not continue when  
you return the first card to the slot again.  
Free Run mode  
The timecode keeps advancing regardless of  
recording.  
Regen mode  
The timecode advances during recording only.  
When you insert another memory card, the  
camcorder starts next recording so that the  
timecode continues to the last recorded timecode  
on the card.  
Clock mode  
The current clock time is recorded for the  
timecode.  
Notes  
• In Interval Recording, Frame Recording, Slow  
& Quick Motion Recording, the timecode  
advances in Rec Run mode regardless of the  
“Run” setting if you set “Mode” of “Timecode”  
to “Preset” with the TC/UB SET menu. If you  
set it to “Clock,” the timecode advances in  
Regen mode.  
• When the Picture Cache function is active  
(P.Cache Rec Setting: On), the timecode always  
advances in Free Run mode. When the Picture  
Cache Rec function is deactivated, the running  
Setting the Time Data  
53  
             
mode selected with the TC/UB SET menu is  
restored.  
Restrictions on the timecode  
The timecode setting is restricted by the current  
video format.  
Setting the Timecode  
Video formats  
Frame  
setting  
00 to 29  
TC Format  
Specify the timecode to be recorded with  
“Timecode” and “TC Format” of the TC/UB SET  
menu.  
HQ 1920/59.94i  
HQ 1920/29.97P  
HQ 1440/59.94i  
HQ 1440/29.97P  
SP 1440/59.94i  
DVCAM59.94i SQ  
DVCAM59.94i EC  
DVCAM29.97P SQ  
DVCAM29.97P EC  
HQ 1920/50i  
DF/NDF switchable  
(Fixed to DF in  
Clock mode)  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu  
TC/UB SET  
B
Ti  
mecode  
Mode  
: Preset  
B
U
sers B i t  
Run  
: Rec Run  
00 to 24  
Fixed to NDF  
TC For  
m
at : DF Set t i ng : 00:00:00:00  
eset  
TC Out : Auto  
HQ 1920/25P  
HQ 1440/50i  
HQ 1440/25P  
00:00  
R
SP 1440/50i  
DVCAM50i SQ  
DVCAM50i EC  
DVCAM25P SQ  
DVCAM25P EC  
Setting the timecode to a desired value  
1
2
Set “Mode” of “Timecode” to “Preset.”  
1)  
3)  
2)  
HQ 1920/23.98P  
HQ 1440/23.98P  
HQ 1280/23.98P  
SP 1440/23.98P  
00 to 23  
00 to 29  
Fixed to NDF  
Specify the timecode value on the  
Setting line and select “SET.”  
DF/NDF switchable  
(Fixed to DF in  
Clock mode)  
Resetting the timecode  
You can reset the timecode to be recorded in  
running modes to “00:00:00:00.”  
HQ 1280/59.94P  
HQ 1280/50P  
00 to 29  
(double  
count)  
DF/NDF switchable  
(Fixed to DF in  
Clock mode)  
1
2
Select “Reset” of “Timecode.”  
Select “Execute.”  
00 to 24  
(double  
count)  
Fixed to NDF  
HQ 1280/29.97P  
00 to 29  
DF/NDF switchable  
(Fixed to DF in  
Clock mode)  
Using the actual time as the timecode  
HQ 1280/25P  
00 to 24  
Fixed to NDF  
Set “Mode” of “Time Code” to “Clock.”  
The time of the built-in clock is recorded as the  
timecode.  
1)The frame digits in “Setting” is limited to 00, 04, 08,  
12, 16, and 20.  
The frame at the beginning of recording is limited to  
00, 04, 08, 12, 16, or 20.  
Switching between DF and NDF of the  
timecode  
As the SDI OUT connector output becomes 60i  
because of the 2-3 pull-down process except when  
“23.98P Output” (page 116) is set to “23.98PsF” for  
1920/23.98P in E-E Display/Recording mode, the  
frame digits of the timecode added to the SDI OUT  
connector output are changed to values in the range of  
00 to 29.  
Using “TC Format” of the TC/UB SET menu, DF  
(drop-frame mode) and NDF (non-drop frame  
mode) of the timecode can be switched.  
Note, however, that the mode is fixed either to DF  
or NDF regardless of the TC Format setting,  
depending on the current frame-rate setting.  
2)Even in Clock mode, the timecode is gradually  
shifted, because it is counted by NDF.  
As any output becomes 2-3 pulled-down video except  
those from the SDI OUT and HDMI OUT connectors  
with “23.98P Output” (page 116) set to “23.98PsF”  
Setting the Time Data  
54  
       
for 1920/23.98P in, there may be a field that has dual  
timecodes on the display.  
3)With DF, the frame digits can be set as desired in the  
range of 00 to 29.  
With NDF, the frame at the beginning of recording is  
limited to 00, 05, 10, 15, 20, or 25.  
Display  
TCG **:**:**:** Tmecode  
Contents  
CLK **:**:**:** Timecode (Clock mode)  
UBG ** ** ** ** User bits  
DUR **:**:**  
Duration from the beginning of  
recording  
Setting the User Bits  
You can add a hexadecimal number of 8 digits for  
pictures as the user bits.  
The user bits can also be set to the current date.  
Use “Users Bit” of the TC/UB SET menu.  
TC/UB SET  
B
Ti  
mecode  
B
U
sers B i t  
Mode  
:
Fix  
TC For  
mat : DF Set t i ng : 20 07 12 08  
00:00  
Setting eight digits as desired  
1
2
Set “Mode” of “Users Bit” to “Fix.”  
Specify the values on the Setting line  
and select “SET.”  
You can set hexadecimal digits A to F with  
the corresponding alphabetics.  
Recording the current date as the user  
bits  
Set “Mode” of “Users Bit” to “Date.”  
The current date is displayed on the Setting line.  
Displaying the Time Data  
In E-E Display/Recording mode, pressing the  
DISPLAY/BATT INFO button displays the time  
data on the screen.  
REC  
TCG 00:00:00:00  
HQ  
1920/59.94i  
S&Q Motion  
The indication is switched among the timecode,  
user bits, and recording duration each time you  
press the TC/U-BIT/DURATION button.  
Setting the Time Data  
55  
         
Low: For music recording or recording in an  
event where high sound pressure may be  
generated  
Recording Audio Signals  
To adjust the levels manually  
Set the AUDIO SELECT switches CH-1 and CH-  
2 to MANUAL and adjust the audio recording  
levels by turning the AUDIO LEVEL controls.  
Set the controls to 5 for the reference setting (0  
dB). Setting to 10 maximizes the level (+12 dB),  
and setting to 0 minimizes it (–).  
Two channels (CH-1/CH-2) of audio can be  
recorded (Linear PCM recording) in  
synchronization with video recording.  
Connect the supplied microphone or an external  
audio source.  
The input levels are displayed on the screen when  
you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO button.  
5
7
10 15 20 30  
oo  
m
18dB SHT:1/2000 CH1  
CH2  
Fine adjustment of the recording is possible using  
“TRIM CH-1” and “TRIM CH-2” of “Audio  
Input” (page 113) of the AUDIO SET menu, For  
high-quality recording, adjust not only the  
AUDIO LEVEL controls but also “TRIM CH-1”  
and “TRIM CH-2” so that the optimum  
microphone sensitivity is obtained. When you  
perform fine adjustments with “TRIM CH-1” and  
“TRIM CH-2,” set the AUDIO LEVEL controls  
to 5 and adjust the items so that the appropriate  
meter indications are obtained.  
AUDIO  
CH-1  
CH-2  
LEVEL  
AUDIO LEVEL controls  
AUDIO  
CH-1  
CH-2  
SELECT  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
If the maximum sound pressure cannot be  
estimated or sudden sound pressure is expected,  
set “Limiter” of “Audio Input” (page 113) of the  
AUDIO SET menu to “On.”  
AUDIO SELECT  
switches  
Adjusting the Audio Recording  
Levels  
Notes  
• When you manually adjust the recording levels,  
check that no distortion is generated, by  
monitoring through headphones, etc.  
• If the AUDIO LEVEL controls are set to a value  
less than 5, the recording levels will not reach  
the full scale.  
You can select automatic or manual adjustment  
mode independently for each channel.  
To adjust the levels automatically (AGC)  
When the AUDIO SELECT switches CH-1 and  
CH-2 are set to AUTO, the audio recording levels  
are automatically adjusted.  
Two AGC modes can be selected with “MIC  
AGC” of “Audio Input” (page 113) of the  
AUDIO SET menu.  
Audio recording in special recording  
modes  
• No audio recording is made in Interval  
Recording or Frame Recording.  
• No audio recording is made in Slow & Quick  
recording if the recording frame rate is set to a  
value different from the playback frame rate.  
High: For general audio recording  
Recording Audio Signals  
56  
               
Monitoring the Audio  
Outputting the Color  
Bars and Reference  
Tone  
You can monitor the sounds being recorded with  
the headphones connected to the headphone  
connector (stereo mini jack).  
Headphone connector  
The camcorder can output a color-bar signal in  
place of the camera picture.  
A 1-kHz reference tone is output with the color  
bar signal if “1kHz Tone” of “Audio Input” (page  
113) is set to “On” with the AUDIO SET menu.  
The color-bar and reference-tone signals are fed  
out from the HD SDI (A/B), SDI OUT, HDMI  
OUT, and i.LINK (HDV/DV) connectors. The  
VIDEO OUT connector outputs the color-bar  
signal only.  
BARS/CAM button  
BARS/CAM  
F REV PLAY/PAUSE F FWD  
j
PREV  
l
G
/S  
J
NEXT  
L
MONITOR  
VOLUME  
THUMBNAIL  
STOP  
s
MONITOR VOLUME buttons  
Note  
The built-in speaker is disabled in E-E Display/  
Recording mode.  
To adjust the audio monitoring volume  
Use the MONITOR VOLUME buttons.  
Pressing the + button increases the volume, and  
pressing the – button decreases it. To muffle the  
sound, set it to the minimum level.  
While you adjust the volume, the level is  
displayed as a bar on the screen.  
Press the BARS/CAM button.  
The camera picture is switched to color bars.  
To return to the camera picture, press the button  
again.  
You can select the type of color bars with “Color  
Bar Type” (page 110) of the CAMERA SET  
menu.  
Multi: ARIB multiformat color bars  
75%: Vertical stripes of 75% luminance  
100%: Vertical stripes of 100% luminance  
Outputting the Color Bars and Reference Tone  
57  
                   
Notes  
• When recording of the camera image is in  
progress, it cannot be switched to the color-bar  
picture even if you press the BARS/CAM  
button. (You can switch the color-bar picture to  
the camera picture.)  
Recording Shot Marks  
When you record shot marks for important scenes  
of a clip recorded in HD mode as subsidiary data,  
you can access the marked points easily on a Shot  
Mark screen, which only displays scenes with  
shot marks only. This increases editing  
efficiency.  
• The color bar mode cannot be selected in Slow  
& Quick Motion mode.  
For the Shot Mark screen, see “Displaying the SHOT  
The camcorder permits you to record two types of  
shot marks: shot mark 1 and shot mark 2.  
Shot marks can be recorded as needed during  
recording or can be added after recording while  
checking the playback pictures.  
Note  
Shot marks cannot be recorded for clips recorded  
in SD mode.  
Inserting a shot mark during recording  
Activate the IR Remote Commander (page 32),  
and use the SHOTMARK 1 or 2 button.  
PUSH SET  
1
SHOTMARK  
2
T
ZOOM  
W
SHOTMARK 1 button  
SHOTMARK 2 button  
THUMBNAIL SUB CLIP  
PREV  
PLAY/PAUSE  
NEXT  
STOP  
.
u
>
x
Press the SHOTMARK 1 or 2 button where  
you wish to insert a mark.  
If the Shot Mark1 or Shot Mark2 function is  
assigned to an assignable button, you can also use  
it instead (page 61).  
A shot mark of the type corresponding to the  
button you press is recorded.  
For operations to add shot marks after recording,  
For specifying a shot mark name using planning  
Recording Shot Marks  
58  
     
To add or delete the OK mark to or from clips  
before the last one  
Use the Clip Operation menu on the thumbnail  
Adding the OK Mark  
screen.  
By adding the OK mark to a clip recorded in HD  
mode, you can prevent the clip from being deleted  
or divided inadvertently.  
The OK mark is also used to obtain a thumbnail  
screen of only the marked clips (OK-Clip  
thumbnail screen) when you press the  
THUMBNAIL button.  
For the OK-Clip thumbnail screen, see “Displaying  
88.  
Note  
The OK mark cannot be added to clips recorded  
in SD mode.  
To add the OK mark in E-E Display mode, assign  
the OK Mark function to an assignable button.  
For function assignment, see “Changing Functions  
Adding the OK mark  
In E-E Display mode, you can add the OK mark  
to the last clip recorded on the SxS memory card  
currently selected.  
When recording of a clip ends, press the  
assignable button to which you assigned the  
OK Mark function.  
The message “OK Mark” is displayed on the  
screen for three seconds.  
Deleting the OK mark  
In E-E Display mode, you can delete the OK mark  
added to the last clip on the SxS memory card  
currently selected.  
1
Press the assignable button to which  
you assigned the OK Mark function.  
The confirmation message “Execute/Cancel”  
is displayed.  
2
Select “Execute.”  
The OK mark of the last clip is deleted.  
Adding the OK Mark  
59  
     
If the clip was recorded in SD mode and  
segmented into multiple files because the file  
size exceeded 2GB, only the last file is played.  
• During Rec Review playback, the playback  
control buttons other than the STOP button are  
disabled.  
• If the video format was changed after recording,  
Rec Review cannot be performed (except when  
the change was from SP 1440/23.98P to SP  
1440/59.94i).  
Rec Review  
You can review the last recorded clip on the  
screen (Rec Review).  
• The Setup and P.PROFILE menus cannot be  
operated during Rec Review.  
REC REVIEW  
EXPANDED  
FOCUS  
REC REVIEW  
button  
Press the REC REVIEW button after  
recording is finished.  
You can assign the Rec Review function to an  
assignable button to use it instead (page 61).  
Playback of the specified block of the clip begins.  
In Rec Review, the last 3 seconds, 10 seconds, or  
the entire part of the clip is displayed, depending  
on the Rec Review setting (page 112) of the  
CAMERA SET menu. It is set to 3 seconds at the  
factory.  
Rec Review is terminated at the end of the clip,  
resuming STBY (recording standby) status.  
To interrupt Rec Review  
Press the REC REVIEW or STOP button or the  
assignable button to which you assigned the Rec  
Review function.  
Rec Review is canceled, resuming STBY  
(recording standby) status.  
Notes  
• If the duration of the last recorded clip is less  
than the time (3 or 10 seconds) specified for Rec  
Review, the clip is played back from the  
beginning to the end.  
Rec Review  
60  
       
ASSIGN 2 button (BRT DISP)  
Brightness-level indication on/off  
Changing Functions of  
the Assignable Buttons  
ASSIGN 3 button (HISTOGRAM)  
Histogram indication on/off  
ASSIGN 4 and ASSIGN 5 buttons  
Recording start/stop  
The camcorder has four assignable buttons to  
which you can assign various functions for  
convenience.  
ASSIGN 6, ASSIGN 7, and ASSIGN 8 buttons  
No function is assigned (Off).  
Changing Functions  
ASSIGN 2 button  
Use “Assign Button” of the OTHERS menu.  
ASSIGN 1 button  
ASSIGN 3 button  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu  
LENS INFO BRT DISP HISTOGRAM  
ASSIGN  
1
2
3
1
Select “Assign Button” from the  
OTHERS menu.  
O
THERS  
3D-Link Mode: Off  
B
<1>  
<2>  
<3>  
<4>  
<5>  
<6>  
:
:
:
:
:
:
Lens Info  
BRT isp  
ND Adjustment  
D
Ti  
m
e Zone  
:
B
UTC +09:00  
Engl i sh  
H
R
O
O
istogram  
ec  
f f  
Clock Set  
Language  
Assign But ton  
Tal l y  
00:00  
:
B
B
f f  
ASSIGN 5  
ASSIGN 6 button  
2
3
Select the button to which you wish to  
assign a function.  
ASSIGN 5 button  
Select the function to be assigned.  
Function  
Marker  
Contents  
ASSIGN 7 button  
All marker indications (safety-  
zone marker, center marker,  
aspect marker, guide frames) on/  
off  
Last Clip DEL Last clip delete  
ATW  
ATW function on/off  
ATW Hold  
Rec Review  
Rec  
ATW Hold function on/off  
Rec Review start/stop  
Recording start/stop  
Picture Cache Picture Cache mode on/off  
ASSIGN 4  
ASSIGN 8  
Freeze Mix  
Expanded  
Focus  
Freeze Mix start/stop  
Expanded Focus function on/off  
AUTO  
WHT BAL  
ASSIGN 8 button  
Spotlight  
TLCS Spotlight mode on/off  
ASSIGN 4 button  
Backlight  
TLCS Backlight mode on/off  
IR Remote Commander enable/  
disable  
IR Remote  
The following functions are assigned at the  
factory:  
1)  
1)  
Shot mark 1 insert  
Shot Mark1  
Shot mark 2 insert  
Shot Mark2  
VF Mode  
ASSIGN 1 button (LENS INFO)  
Depth-of-field indication on/off  
Viewfinder screen mode (color/  
monochrome) switching  
Changing Functions of the Assignable Buttons  
61  
                                           
Function  
BRT Disp  
Histogram  
Lens Info  
Contents  
Brightness level indication on/off  
Histogram indication on/off  
Depth-of-Field indication on/off  
OK Mark add/delete  
Interval Recording  
1)  
OK Mark  
LCD/VF  
Adjust  
Brightness/contrast level bar on/  
off  
The Interval Recording (time-lapse recording)  
function is especially effective for shooting  
objects that move very slowly.  
1)Valid in HD mode only  
The specified number of frames are automatically  
recorded at the specified intervals.  
4
Exit the menu.  
The assigned functions can be viewed on the  
BUTTON/REMOTE status screen (page 105).  
Recording interval (Interval Time)  
Number of frames for one recording session  
(Number of Frames)  
It is recommended to fix the camcorder to a tripod  
or equivalent and use the IR Remote Commander  
to start/stop recording rather than the camcorder.  
Notes  
• Interval Recording cannot be set to “On”  
simultaneously with Frame Recording, Picture  
Cache Recording, or Slow & Quick Motion.  
When you set Interval Recording to “On,”  
Frame Recording, Picture Cache Recording and  
Slow & Quick Motion are forcibly set to “Off.”  
• No audio recording is executed in Interval  
Recording.  
• Interval Recording cannot be made if a setting  
which includes “HDV” or “DVCAM” is  
selected with “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select”  
of the VIDEO SET menu.  
• Interval Recording cannot be performed if  
“Format” of “System” of the OTHERS menu is  
set to “SP 1440/23.98P.”  
Interval Recording  
62  
           
The flashing “Interval Rec” on the screen is now  
steadily lit.  
Preparatory Settings  
Notes  
Before starting Interval Recording, make the  
necessary settings on the CAMERA SET menu in  
advance.  
• You cannot change the “Interval Time” and  
“Number of Frames” settings while Interval  
Recording is in progress. To change them,  
pause recording.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu  
• After starting Interval Recording, Rec Review  
operation is disabled, even during an interval.  
• The timecode is recorded in Rec Run mode  
(page 54) during Interval Recording.  
• Some extra frames may be recorded if you stop  
recording or switch the card slot while  
recording is halted in Interval Recording mode.  
1
Select “Interval Rec” of the CAMERA  
SET menu.  
C
A
MERA  
SET  
B
B
B
Gain Setup  
Shut ter  
S
lo  
w
Shutter  
Color  
B
ar Type  
:
Mul t i  
00:00  
B
B
B
F l i cker Reduce  
I n ter val Rec  
Set t ing  
Interval  
:
:
Of f  
1sec  
1
Stopping Interval Recording  
T
i
me  
m
Frame Rec  
Number of Fra  
es :  
Press the REC START/STOP button on the  
handle or the grip.  
2
Set “Setting” to “On.”  
Interval Recording stops.  
To restart Interval Recording, press the button  
again.  
The camcorder enters Interval Recording  
mode.  
When the special recording mode indication  
on the screen is active, “Interval Rec” flashes  
on the screen.  
Canceling Interval Recording mode  
Set “Setting” of “Interval Rec” of the CAMERA  
SET menu to “Off.”  
3
4
Set the time between recordings with  
“Interval Time.”  
Note  
You can select the time from among 1 to10/  
15/20/30/40/50 seconds, 1 to 10/15/20/30/  
40/50 minutes, and 1 to 4/6/12/24 hours by  
scrolling the display.  
It automatically returns to “Off” when you set the  
power switch to OFF, while the “Interval Time”  
and “Number of Frames” settings are maintained.  
Set the number of frames to be recorded  
at a time with “Number of Frames.”  
When the video format (page 40) is set to  
“HQ 1280/59.94P” or “HQ 1280/50P,” you  
can select from among 2, 6, and 12 frames.  
With other settings, you can select from  
among 1, 3, 6, and 9 frames.  
5
Exit the menu.  
Performing Interval Recording  
When the preparatory settings are completed, you  
can start recording.  
Press the REC START/STOP button on the  
handle or the grip.  
Interval Recording begins.  
Interval Recording  
63  
   
2
3
Set “Setting” to “On.”  
The camcorder enters Frame Recording  
mode.  
When the special recording mode indication  
on the screen is active, “Frame Rec” flashes  
on the screen.  
Frame Recording  
The Frame Recording function is especially  
effective for clay animation recording.  
The specified number of frames are recorded  
intermittently when you press a recording start  
button.  
It is recommended to fix the camcorder to a tripod  
or equivalent and use the IR Remote Commander  
to start/stop recording rather than pressing a  
recording start button of the camcorder.  
Select the “Number of Frames” value  
for one recording session.  
You can select from among 2, 6, and 12 when  
the video format (page 41) is set to 720/  
59.94P or 720/50P.  
With other video formats, you can select  
from among 1, 3, 6, and 9.  
4
Exit the menu.  
Notes  
• Frame Recording cannot be set to “On”  
simultaneously with Interval Recording, Picture  
Cache Recording or Slow & Quick Motion.  
When you set Frame Recording to “On,”  
Interval Recording, Picture Cache Recording  
and Slow & Quick Motion are forcibly set to  
“Off.”  
• No audio recording is executed in Frame  
Recording.  
• Frame Recording cannot be made if a setting  
which includes “HDV” or “DVCAM” is  
selected with “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select”  
of the VIDEO SET menu.  
Performing Frame Recording  
When the preparatory settings are completed, you  
can start recording.  
1
Press the REC START/STOP button on  
the handle or the grip.  
Recording in Frame Rec mode begins.  
The “Frame Rec” indication stops flashing.  
When the number of frames you specified  
with the menu are recorded, the camcorder  
automatically enters FRM STBY (Frame Rec  
Standby) status.  
• Frame Recording cannot be performed if  
“Format” of “System” of the OTHERS menu is  
set to “SP 1440/23.98P.”  
2
Press the REC START/STOP button  
again.  
Each time you press the REC START/STOP  
button, the camcorder records the specified  
number of frames then enters FRM STBY  
status.  
Preparatory Settings  
Before starting Frame Recording, make the  
necessary settings on the CAMERA SET menu in  
advance.  
Notes  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu  
• Recording cannot be stopped until the specified  
number of frames are recorded. If the power  
switch is set to OFF during recording, the power  
is only shut off after the specified number of  
frames are recorded.  
1
Select “Frame Rec” of the CAMERA  
SET menu.  
• The Rec Review function cannot be used while  
recording in Frame Rec mode is in progress.  
• You cannot change the “Number of Frames”  
setting while recording in Frame Rec mode is in  
progress. To change it, pause the recording.  
• The timecode is recorded in Rec Run mode  
(page 54) during Frame Recording.  
C
A
M
E
R
A
SET  
B
B
Shut ter  
lo hutter  
Color ar ype  
S
w
S
B
T
:
Mul t i  
B
B
B
B
F l i cker Reduce  
I n ter val Rec  
Fra  
00:00  
m
e Rec  
Set ting  
ber of Fra  
:
O
O
f f  
n
P.  
C
ache Rec  
N
u
m
m
es :  
Frame Recording  
64  
       
• Some extra frames may be recorded if you stop  
recording or switch the card slot while  
recording is paused in Frame Rec mode.  
Picture Cache Recording  
Stopping Frame Recording  
Set “Setting” of “Frame Rec” of the  
CAMERA SET menu to “Off.”  
When the Picture Cache function is active, the  
camcorder stores the last few seconds of video  
captured in the built-in cache memory to permit  
you to start recording video on an SxS memory  
card from a point before you start recording.  
The maximum picture cache time is 15 seconds.  
Recording stops and Frame Rec mode is  
canceled.  
Note  
It automatically returns to “Off” when you set the  
power switch to OFF, while the “Number of  
Frames” setting is maintained.  
Notes  
• Picture Cache Recording cannot be set to “On”  
simultaneously with Frame Recording, Interval  
Recording, or Slow & Quick Motion. When you  
set Picture Cache Recording to “On,” Frame  
Recording, Interval Recording and Slow &  
Quick Motion are forcibly set to “Off.”  
• The following operations set Picture Cache  
Recording to “Off.”  
—Setting Interval Recording to “On”  
—Setting Frame Recording to “On”  
—Setting Slow & Quick Motion to “On”  
—Changing the recording format  
• When Picture Cache Recording is “On,” the  
time code is recorded in Clock mode when it is  
selected with the TC/UB SET menu (page 53)  
or in Free Run mode in other conditions.  
Preparatory Settings  
Before starting Picture Cache Recording, make  
the necessary settings on the CAMERA SET  
menu in advance.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu  
1
Select “P.Cache Rec” of the CAMERA  
SET menu.  
C
S
Color  
A
lo  
M
w
E
R
S
B
A
SET  
hutter  
ar ype  
B
T
:
Mul t i  
B
B
B
B
B
F l i cker Reduce  
I n ter val Rec  
00:00  
Fra  
P.  
S&Q Mot i on  
me Rec  
Cache Rec  
Set ting  
Rec Time  
:
:
O
f f  
13-15sec  
2
Set “Setting” to “On.”  
Picture Cache Recording  
65  
         
The Picture Cache Recording is enabled and  
the CACHE REC lamp lights.  
Recording begins, and stored video in the cache  
memory is written first to the SxS memory card.  
The on-screen “zCACHE” indication changes to  
zREC.”  
CACHE REC lamp  
Stopping Picture Cache Recording  
CACHE  
REC  
Press the REC START/STOP button on the  
handle or the grip.  
Canceling Picture Cache function  
Set “Setting” of “P.Cache Rec” of the CAMERA  
SET menu to “Off” or press the assignable button  
to which you assigned the Picture Cache function.  
Notes  
• If you change the recording format, the cached  
data are cleared and caching is newly started.  
Therefore, data cached before you changed the  
format cannot be recorded if you start Picture  
Cache Recording immediately after changing  
the format.  
• If you start/stop Picture Cache Recording  
immediately after you insert an SxS memory  
card, data may not be recorded on the card.  
• Picture caching starts when you activate the  
Picture Cache function. Therefore, video before  
the function is activated cannot be recorded  
with Picture Cache Recording.  
The Setting On/Off operation can be  
alternatively made by using an assignable  
button if you assign the Picture Cache  
function to the button.  
For function assignment, see “Changing  
61.  
3
4
Set the time to cache video with “Rec  
Time.”  
• Picture Cache Recording is invalid for external  
input signal (HDV).  
You can select the time from among 0-2 sec,  
2-4 sec, 4-6 sec, 6-8 sec, 8-10 sec, and 13-15  
sec.  
(The actual time to trace back to start  
recording may vary within the selected time  
range depending on conditions.)  
• As picture caching is disabled while an SxS  
memory card is being accessed, such as during  
playback, Rec Review, or thumbnail screen  
display, Picture Cache Recording of such a  
period cannot be made.  
• Although you can change the “Rec Time”  
setting on the menu even while recording is in  
progress, any new value becomes valid in such  
a case only after recording is stopped.  
Exit the menu.  
The special recording/operation status indication  
block on the screen shows “zCACHE.” (z in  
green).  
Performing Picture Cache  
Recording  
Starting Picture Cache Recording  
Check that the CACHE REC lamp is lit and  
press the REC START/STOP button on the  
handle or the grip.  
Picture Cache Recording  
66  
   
Preparatory Settings  
Slow & Quick Motion  
Recording  
Before starting Slow & Quick Motion recording,  
make the necessary settings with the CAMERA  
SET menu in advance.  
When the camcorder is in HD mode and one of  
the following video formats is selected (page 40),  
you can set a frame rate for recording different  
from that for playback:  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu  
1
Select “S&Q Motion” from the  
CAMERA SET menu.  
NTSC Area/NTSC (J) Area  
HQ 1920/29.97P, HQ 1920/23.98P, HQ 1280/  
59.94P, HQ 1280/29.97P, HQ 1280/23.98P  
C
Color  
F l i cker Reduce  
I n ter val Rec  
Fra  
A
M
E
R
B
A
SET  
ar ype  
T
:
Mul t i  
B
B
B
B
B
B
PAL Area  
m
e Rec  
HQ 1920/25P, HQ 1280/50P, HQ 1280/25P  
00:00  
P.  
C
ache Rec  
S&Q Mot i on  
Rec Review  
O
n For  
m
at  
:
:
HQ1280/23.98  
60/60  
P
S&Q Rati o  
By recording at a different frame rate, you can  
obtain a smoother slow-motion or quick-motion  
effect than with slow-speed or fast-speed  
playback of a material recorded at the normal  
recording speed.  
2
Select the video format for Slow &  
Quick Motion recording with “On  
Format.”  
Example  
3
Select the frame rate for recording with  
“S&Q Ratio.”  
When the video format is HQ 1280/23.98P,  
recording with a frame rate between 1 and 23 fps  
provides a quick-motion effect in playback, and  
recording with a frame rate between 25 and 60 fps  
provides a slow-motion effect in playback.  
The setting range varies depending on the  
current video format.  
With a format of 1920 horizontal  
resolution: 1 to 30 fps  
With a format of 1280 horizontal  
resolution: 1 to 60 fps  
Notes  
• Slow & Quick Motion recording cannot be  
activated in SD mode.  
4
5
Exit the menu.  
• Slow & Quick Motion recording cannot be  
made if a setting which includes “HDV” or  
“DVCAM” is selected with “SDI/HDMI/  
i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu.  
• When you set Slow & Quick Motion to “On,”  
Frame Recording, Interval Recording, and  
Picture Cache Recording are forcibly set to  
“Off.” However, Slow & Quick Motion cannot  
be activated while Frame Recording, Interval  
Recording, or Picture Cache Recording is in  
progress.  
Press the S&Q dial.  
A confirmation message is displayed.  
6
Operating the jog dial, select “Execute.”  
The camcorder enters Slow & Quick Motion  
mode and the indicator lights.  
• No audio recording is made if the recording  
frame rate is set to a value different from the  
playback frame rate.  
• The timecode is recorded in Rec Run mode  
(page 54) during Slow & Quick Motion  
recording.  
Slow & Quick Motion Recording  
67  
         
Stopping recording  
Press the REC START/STOP button on the  
handle or the grip.  
Slow & Quick Motion recording stops.  
Note  
When recording at a low-speed frame rate, it may  
take time until recording stops after you press the  
REC START/STOP button.  
Canceling Slow & Quick Motion mode  
CACHE  
REC  
Press the S&Q dial.  
Note  
S&Q  
Slow & Quick Motion mode is automatically  
canceled when you set the power switch to OFF,  
while the “On Format” and “S&Q Ratio” settings  
are maintained.  
S&Q dial  
In Slow & Quick Motion mode, the frame rate can  
be varied by rotating the S&Q dial.  
When the special recording mode indication on  
the screen is active, “S&Q Motion” is displayed  
on the screen and [Recording frame rate]/  
[Playback frame rate] fps is displayed under  
“S&Q Motion.”  
REC  
TCG 00:00:00:00  
HQ  
1920/23.98P  
S&Q Motion  
29/24fps  
Recording in Slow & Quick Motion  
Mode  
Starting recording  
When the preparatory settings are completed, you  
can start recording.  
Press the REC START/STOP button on the  
handle or the grip.  
Slow & Quick Motion recording begins.  
Notes  
• You cannot change the “On Format” and “S&Q  
Ratio” settings while Slow & Quick Motion  
recording is in progress. To change them, pause  
the recording.  
• The timecode is recorded in Rec Run mode  
during Slow & Quick Motion recording (page  
53).  
Slow & Quick Motion Recording  
68  
 
• The Freeze Mix function cannot be used if the  
recording video format is SP 1440/23.98P.  
• If the recorded picture and the current camera  
picture differ in video format, the Freeze Mix  
display cannot be achieved.  
• The Freeze Mix display cannot be obtained in  
Slow & Quick Motion mode or Slow Shutter  
mode.  
Freeze Mix: Image  
Alignment  
Using the Freeze Mix function, an image (still  
picture) of a clip recorded in HD mode can be  
temporarily superimposed on the current camera  
picture, permitting you to easily align images for  
next recording.  
• You cannot operate the Setup menus and  
P.PROFILE menu in Freeze Mix status.  
To use the Freeze Mix function  
Assign the Freeze Mix function to one of the  
assignable buttons.  
Superimposing a Freeze Mix image  
1
2
Stop recording to set the camcorder to  
STBY (recording standby) status.  
Press the REC REVIEW button to  
review the recorded images, or press the  
ASSIGN button to which you assigned  
“Freeze Mix.”  
3
Press the ASSIGN button to which you  
assigned “Freeze Mix” at the image  
with which you want align.  
The image where you pressed the ASSIGN button  
in step 3 is displayed as a still picture over the  
current camera picture.  
Canceling Freeze Mix status  
You can cancel it with the ASSIGN button to  
which you assigned “Freeze Mix” or the REC  
START/STOP button on the handle or the grip.  
• When you cancel Freeze Mix status by pressing  
the ASSIGN button, the normal camera picture  
is restored.  
• When you cancel Freeze Mix status by pressing  
the REC START/STOP button on the handle or  
the grip, normal recording begins.  
Notes  
• The Freeze Mix function cannot be used in SD  
mode.  
Freeze Mix: Image Alignment  
69  
   
1
2
Press the PICTURE PROFILE button.  
The P.PROFILE menu is displayed.  
Picture Profiles  
Operating the jog dial, select “SEL”  
from the P. PROFILE menu then select  
the picture profile number (PP1 to  
PP10) to operate.  
You can customize the picture quality, depending  
on the conditions or circumstances of recording,  
and store them as a picture profile, enabling the  
picture quality to be resumed just by your  
selecting the picture profile.  
P
.
PROFILE  
OFF  
SEL  
SET  
PP1: STANDARD  
PP2: STANDARD  
PP3: STANDARD  
PP4: STANDARD  
PP5: STANDARD  
PP6: STANDARD  
Ten different picture profiles (PP1 to PP10) can  
be stored in memory.  
The same standard (reference) values are  
registered to six picture profiles at the factory as  
those specified for the Picture Profile Off status.  
The P.PROFILE menu is available for picture-  
profile operations.  
3
Operating the jog dial, select “SET”  
and make the settings of the picture  
profile items.  
Note  
The picture profiles can be operated only in E-E  
Display mode.  
P
SEL  
SET  
.
PROF  
I
LE  
PP1: STANDARD  
Pro f i le Na  
m
e
When an external remote control device, such as  
the RM-B750/B150 Remote Control Unit, is  
connected, PP10 is automatically selected, and  
the picture profiles can be adjusted from the  
control device.  
B
B
B
B
M
atrix  
ulti  
hi te  
HD Detail  
M
M
atrix  
W
For details on the setting items, see “Picture  
For details, refer to the Supplement in the supplied  
CD-ROM labeled “Manuals for Solid-State Memory  
Camcorder.”  
4
When the settings are completed, press  
the PICTURE PROFILE button to exit  
the menu.  
Registering the Customized  
Settings as a Picture Profile  
Selecting a Picture Profile  
PICTURE PROFILE button  
Selecting a Picture Profile using the  
P.PROFILE menu  
SEL/SET  
CANCEL  
B
PICTURE PROFILE  
Once you store a picture profile, you can call the  
picture quality registered in the picture profile as  
follows:  
1
2
Press the PICTURE PROFILE button.  
The P.PROFILE menu is displayed.  
Operating the jog dial, select “SEL”  
then the desired picture profile from the  
list.  
Picture Profiles  
70  
             
Example:  
Resetting a Picture Profile  
P
.
PROFILE  
OFF  
You can reset a selected picture profile to the  
factory settings (standard status).  
SEL  
SET  
PP1: SceneA  
PP2: SceneB  
PP3: SceneC  
PP4: SceneD  
PP5: SceneE  
PP6: SceneF  
1
Select the picture profile you wish to  
reset as mentioned in “Selecting a  
The camcorder is adjusted to the picture  
quality specified by the selected Profile.  
(If you select “OFF,” the camcorder will be  
fixed at the standard picture quality, and no  
picture adjustment is allowed.)  
2
3
Select “Reset” from “SET” of the  
P.PROFILE menu.  
“Execute” and “Cancel” are displayed.  
Select “Execute.”  
3
Press the PICTURE PROFILE button  
to exit the menu.  
Resetting begins.  
When resetting ends, the completion message is  
displayed for three seconds, and the original  
screen display is restored.  
The picture profile being selected is displayed  
when you press the DISPLAY/BATT INFO  
button.  
Storing a Picture Profile on an SxS  
Memory Card  
TLCS  
.
1
1.5  
2
3
4
5
7
++  
T1.6 18dB  
A picture profile can be sent to and stored on an  
SxS memory card as a file (filename:  
PPDATA.SUF).  
ATW 4300K PP  
1
Copying the Settings of a Picture  
Profile  
Only one picture profile can be stored on the same  
memory card. The stored picture profile can be  
immediately reproduced by reading from the  
memory card.  
You can copy the settings of a selected picture  
profile to another picture profile.  
Storing a Picture Profile  
1
Select the source picture profile as  
mentioned in “Selecting a Picture  
Profile using the P. PROFILE menu”.  
1
Insert a recordable SxS memory card  
into a slot.  
Confirm that the corresponding access lamp  
is lit in green.  
2
Select “Copy” from “SET” of the  
P.PROFILE menu.  
The picture profile numbers are listed on the  
screen.  
2
Select the picture profile to be stored.  
The selected picture profile number is  
displayed at the bottom of the screen.  
3
4
Specify the target picture profile.  
“Execute” and “Cancel” are displayed.  
Select “Execute.”  
3
4
Select “SET” of the P. PROFILE menu.  
Select “Store” of “PP Data.”  
Copying begins.  
When copying ends, the completion message is  
displayed for three seconds, and the original  
screen display is restored.  
Picture Profiles  
71  
     
When overwriting to the picture profile you  
specified in step 2 ends, the completion message  
is displayed for three seconds, and the loaded  
settings are immediately reflected.  
P
SEL  
SET  
.
PROFILE  
PP1: STANDARD  
Black  
:
:
:
B
B
0
0
0
Black  
Low Key SAT  
opy  
PP  
eset  
G
amma  
Note  
C
D
ata  
Store  
ecall  
After you start loading, do not remove the SxS  
memory card until the completion message is  
displayed.  
R
R
The message “PP Data Store Execute/  
Cancel” is displayed at the bottom of the  
screen.  
5
Select “Execute.”  
Writing of the selected picture profile to the  
memory card begins.  
When writing ends, the completion message is  
displayed for three seconds, and the original  
screen display is restored.  
Note  
After you start writing, do not remove the SxS  
memory card until the completion message is  
displayed.  
Loading a Picture Profile  
1
2
Insert the SxS memory card that  
contains the picture profile to be loaded  
into a slot.  
Confirm that the corresponding access lamp  
is lit in green.  
Select the picture profile name for  
which the picture profile is to be loaded  
from the memory card.  
The selected picture profile number is  
displayed at the bottom of the screen.  
3
4
Select “SET” of the P.PROFILE menu.  
Select “Recall” of “PP Data.”  
The message “PP Data Recall Execute/  
Cancel” is displayed at the bottom of the  
screen.  
5
Select “Execute.”  
Loading of the picture profile from the  
memory card begins.  
Picture Profiles  
72  
Picture Profile Items  
The values when “Off” is selected at “SEL” of the P.PROFILE menu are shown in bold face (example:  
Standard).  
P. PROFILE SET  
Items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Profile name  
Set the profile name in 8 characters at maximum.  
Profile Name  
Changing the picture profile  
name  
You can use upper- and lowercase alphabetics,  
numerics 0 to 9, - (hyphen), _ (underscore) and  
space.  
Setting  
On / Off  
Set to “On” to activate the color phase adjustment  
function with matrix operations for the entire  
picture.  
Matrix  
Adjusting the color phase  
over the entire area with  
matrix operations  
Note  
When this function is set to “Off,” Multi Matrix is  
also set to “Off” in synchronization.  
Select  
Select the built-in preset matrix provided for  
convenience.  
Standard / High SAT / FL  
Light / Cinema / F35 709 Like  
Level  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Adjust the color saturation for the entire picture  
area.  
Phase  
Adjust the hue for the entire picture area.  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
R-G, R-B, G-R, G-B, B-R, B-G  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Finely adjust the color phase for the entire picture  
area by independently setting each of the factors.  
Setting  
On / Off  
Set to “On” to enable the multi-matrix correction,  
which allows specific colors to be selected for  
saturation correction in a 16-axis hue space.  
Multi Matrix  
Makes settings related to  
multi-matrix correction.  
1)  
Set to “On” to display a zebra pattern in the areas of  
the specified color for multi-matrix correction.  
Area Indication  
On / Off  
2)  
Execute to detect the target color on the screen for  
multi-matrix correction.  
Color Detection  
Execute/Cancel  
Axis  
Specify a color targeted by multi-matrix correction  
B / B+ /MG- / MG / MG+ / R / (16-axis mode).  
R+ / YL- / YL /YL+ / G- / G /  
G+ / CY / CY+ / B-  
Hue  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Saturation  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Set the the hue of the color targeted by multi-matrix  
correction for each 16-axis mode.  
Adjust the saturation of the color targeted by multi-  
matrix correction for each 16-axis mode.  
Picture Profiles  
73  
           
P. PROFILE SET  
Items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Offset White  
Set to “On” to shift the conversion value for auto  
White  
On / Off  
white balance in Memory A or B mode and that for  
auto tracing white in ATW mode to a lower color  
temperature or a higher color temperature.  
Setting the white balance  
offset and the color  
temperature of the preset  
white  
Offset<A>  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Adjust the volume of the offset white (shifting  
volumes) of the conversion value in Memory A,  
Memory B, or ATW mode, respectively.  
Offset<B>  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Offset<ATW>  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Preset White  
2100 to 10000 (3200)  
Adjust the preset color temperature when Preset  
white balance mode is selected in steps of 100K.  
Notes  
• Except when the white balance is in Memory A  
or B mode or when ATW is active, you cannot  
confirm the result of changing the Offset White  
and Offset settings on the screen.  
• Except when Preset white balance mode is  
selected, you cannot confirm the result of  
changing the Preset White settings on the screen.  
Setting  
Set to “On” to apply the details to the video signal.  
HD Detail  
On / Off  
Adjusting the details to be  
applied to the picture in HD  
mode  
Level  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Adjust the detail level.  
Frequency  
Set the center frequency of the details.  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Setting the center frequency higher decreases the  
details, and setting it lower increases the details.  
Crispening  
Adjust the noise-suppression level.  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
When you set it to a higher level, less noise may be  
seen, as fine elements of details are deleted leaving  
only high-level elements.  
When you set it to a lower level, fine elements are  
applied while increasing noise.  
H/V Ratio  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Adjust the horizontal-to-vertical ratio of detail  
elements.  
A higher value makes the vertical elements  
increased with respect to the horizontal elements.  
White Limiter  
Limit the white details.  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Black Limiter  
Limit the black details.  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
V DTL Creation  
NAM / Y / G / G+R  
Select the source signal to generate vertical details  
from among NAM (G or R whichever is higher), Y,  
G, and G+R.  
Knee APT Level  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Adjust the knee aperture level (level of details to be  
applied to the sections above the knee point).  
Picture Profiles  
74  
   
P. PROFILE SET  
Items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Setting Set to “On” to apply the details to the video signal.  
On / Off  
Level  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Frequency  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
SD Detail  
Adjusting the details to be  
applied to the picture in SD  
mode  
Adjust the detail level.  
Set the center frequency of the details.  
Setting the center frequency higher decreases the  
details, and setting it lower increases the details.  
Crispening  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Adjust the noise-suppression level.  
When you set it to a higher level, less noise may be  
seen, as fine elements of details are deleted leaving  
only high-level elements.  
When you set it to a lower level, fine elements are  
applied while increasing noise.  
H/V Ratio  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Adjust the horizontal-to-vertical ratio of detail  
elements.  
A higher value makes the vertical elements  
increased with respect to the horizontal elements.  
White Limiter  
Limit the white details.  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Black Limiter  
Limit the black details.  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
V DTL Creation  
NAM / Y / G / G+R  
Select the source signal to generate vertical details  
from among NAM (G or R whichever is higher), Y,  
G, and G+R.  
Knee APT Level  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Adjust the knee aperture level (level of details to be  
applied to the sections above the knee point).  
Picture Profiles  
75  
 
P. PROFILE SET  
Items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Setting Set to “On” to enable the detail level adjustment for  
On / Off  
Skin Tone Detail  
Adjusting the details to be  
applied to the areas of a  
specific color phase  
specific color-phase areas.  
The detail level is uniform over the entire picture  
with the Off setting.  
Level  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Adjust the skin-tone detail level.  
2)  
Execute to detect the color in the center of the  
screen. The area centering around the detected  
color becomes the target area for Skin Tone Detail  
control.  
Area Detection  
Execute/Cancel  
1)  
Set to “On” to display the Zebra 1 pattern for the  
target area for Skin Tone Detail control.  
Area Indication  
On / Off  
Saturation  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Adjust the color (saturation) level for Skin Tone  
Detail control.  
Note  
When Area Detection is executed, this setting is  
automatically returned to 0.  
Phase  
0 to 359 (130)  
Adjust the center color-phase value for the target  
area for Skin Tone Detail control.  
Note  
When Area Detection is executed, this setting is  
automatically changed to the value equivalent to  
that of the detected color.  
Width  
0 to 90 (40)  
Adjust the width of the color phase of the target  
area for Skin Tone Detail control.  
Note  
When Area Detection is executed, the Width  
setting automatically returns to 40.  
Setting  
On / Off  
Set to “On” to enable aperture correction  
(processing to improve resolution by adding high-  
frequency aperture signals to the video signal,  
which corrects degeneration due to high-frequency  
characteristics).  
Aperture  
Making settings related to  
aperture correction  
Level  
Select the level for the aperture correction.  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Picture Profiles  
76  
 
P. PROFILE SET  
Items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Setting Set to “On” to compress the high-luminance area of  
On / Off  
Knee  
Adjusting the knee level  
the picture.  
Note  
Knee is fixed and cannot be changed in the  
following cases:  
• When Gamma is set to CINE1 to 4  
• When the electronic shutter is in Slow Shutter  
mode  
Auto Knee  
On / Off  
Set to “On” to automatically set the best knee  
conditions according to the luminance level of the  
picture.  
With “Off” the knee conditions can be manually  
adjusted independently of the luminance level of  
the picture.  
Point  
Set the knee point when Auto Knee is “Off.”  
50 to 109 (90)  
Slope  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Set the knee slope (volume of compression) when  
Auto Knee is “Off.”  
Knee SAT Level  
0 to 99 (50)  
Adjust the knee saturation level for the area over  
the knee point.  
Level  
Adjust the gamma compensation level.  
Gamma  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Adjusting the gamma  
compensation level and  
selecting the gamma curve  
Select the type of reference curve for gamma  
compensation.  
STD1 DVW: DVW camcorder equivalent  
Select  
STD1 DVW / STD2 ×4.5 /  
STD3 ×3.5 / STD4 240M /  
STD5 R709 / STD6 ×5.0 /  
CINE1 / CINE2 / CINE3 /  
CINE4  
STD2 ×4.5: ×4.5 gain  
STD3 ×3.5: ×3.5 gain  
STD4 240M: SMPTE-240M equivalent  
STD5 R709: ITU-R709 equivalent  
STD6 ×5.0: ×5.0 gain  
CINE1: This smoothes the contrast in darker areas  
and accentuates gradation changes in brighter  
areas, for a calm and quiet effect (F35  
HG4609G33).  
CINE2: This gives almost the same results as  
CINE1. Select this when you wish to obtain  
100% video signals for editing or other purposes  
(F35 HG4600G30).  
CINE3: This emphasizes the contrast between light  
and dark more than CINE1 and CINE2, and also  
accentuates gradation changes on the black side.  
CINE4: This emphasizes the contrast in dark areas  
more than CINE3. Contrast in dark areas is  
weaker and contrast in bright areas is stronger  
than STD curves.  
Note  
When the camcorder is in SD mode, the default  
setting is “STD4 240M.”  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Adjust the master black level.  
Black  
Adjusting the black  
Picture Profiles  
77  
     
P. PROFILE SET  
Items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Adjust the level of black gamma function that  
Black Gamma  
Adjusting the black gamma  
level  
emphasizes only the dark areas of the picture to  
clear the tones or on the contrary de-emphasizes it  
to reduce noise.  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Adjust the level of the low key saturation to  
heighten the colors only in the dark areas of the  
picture or pale them to reduce noise.  
Low Key SAT  
Adjusting the low key  
saturation  
Execute / Cancel  
Select “Execute” to copy.  
Copy  
Copying a picture profile  
Store  
Recall  
To store a picture profile on an SxS memory card.  
To load a picture profile from an SxS memory card.  
PP Data  
Writing/loading a picture  
profile  
Execute / Cancel  
Select “Execute” to reset.  
Reset  
Resetting a picture profile  
1)The Area Indication setting is common to all picture  
profiles PP1 to PP10.  
2)To execute “Color Detection” or “Area  
Detection”  
1. Select “Color Detection” or “Area  
Detection.”  
A square marker that indicates the detection  
area appears in the center of the screen, and  
“Execute” and “Cancel” are displayed below.  
2. Select “Execute.”  
Color-phase detection in the marker area is  
performed.  
When detection successfully ends, a  
completion message is displayed then the  
screen is restored.  
With Multi Matrix, the target color of multi-  
matrix correction is changed to the color  
detected by “Color Detection,” and the Area  
Indication (zebra pattern) appears on the  
screen.  
With Skin Tone Detail, the target area for the  
adjustment is changed to the area centering  
around the color detected by “Area  
Detection,” and the Area Indication (zebra  
pattern) appears on the screen.  
If detection fails, an error message appears,  
then the precious screen is restored.  
Picture Profiles  
78  
             
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu  
Deleting Clips  
Deleting Clips Collectively  
Using the Setup menu, you can delete the  
recorded clips collectively from the SxS memory  
card in the selected card slot.  
In E-E Display mode, the Last Clip DEL function  
for deleting the last recorded clip and the All  
Clips DEL function for deleting all clips from an  
SxS memory card are available.  
1
2
3
Select “All Clips DEL” from “Clip” of  
the OTHERS menu.  
For clip deletion in Thumbnail Screen mode, see  
Select “Execute.”  
A confirmation message is displayed.  
Deleting the Last Recorded Clip  
Select “Execute” again.  
Using the assignable button to which you  
assigned the Last Clip DEL function or the Setup  
menu, the last recorded clip is easily deleted.  
All the clips are deleted from the memory  
card.  
Notes  
To delete using the assignable button  
• If the SxS memory card contains clips of both of  
HD mode and SD mode, only the clips of the  
currently selected mode are deleted.  
• Clips with the OK mark applied cannot be  
deleted.  
Assign the Last Clip DEL function to one of the  
assignable buttons (see page 61) in advance.  
1
2
Press the assignable button to which  
you have assigned “Last Clip DEL.”  
For details on the OK mark, see “Adding/Deleting  
A confirmation message is displayed.  
Operating the jog dial, select “Execute.”  
The last recorded clip is deleted from the  
memory card.  
To delete using the Setup menu  
1
Select “Last Clip DEL” from “Clip” of  
the OTHERS menu.  
O
B
THERS  
at tery  
A
lar  
m
B
B
B
:
Battery  
enlock  
Tr i gger  
I
NFO  
Auto Naming  
Ti t l e Pref i x  
:
:
:
B
Plan  
234_  
0001  
G
M
ode  
Both  
Number  
Set  
00:00  
S
C
yste  
l i p  
m
B
B
B
Update  
Execute  
Cancel  
Last  
A l l  
C
l i p DEL  
Copy All  
C
l i ps DEL  
2
3
Select “Execute.”  
A confirmation message is displayed.  
Select “Execute” again.  
The last recorded clip is deleted from the  
memory card.  
Deleting Clips  
79  
           
Loading a Planning Metadata File  
Operating Planning  
Metadata  
To record planning metadata together with clips,  
it is necessary to load a planning metadata file  
into the camcorder’s memory in advance.  
There are two ways to load files.  
• Load a file (.xml) stored under the directory of  
“BPAV/General/Sony/Planning” on an SxS  
memory card.  
• When a Wi-Fi connection is made between the  
camcorder and a computer, operate the Web  
menu built into the camcorder from the  
computer to transfer a file.  
Planning metadata is information about shooting  
and recording plans, recorded in an XML file.  
You can shoot using clip names and shot mark  
names defined in advance in a planning metadata  
file.  
Example of a planning metadata file  
For details on how to use the Web menu to load a  
planning metadata file, refer to the Supplement in the  
supplied CD-ROM labeled “Manuals for Solid-State  
Memory Camcorder”.  
Loading planning metadata  
Use “Plan.Metadata” of the OTHERS menu and  
proceed as follows:  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic Menu  
This camcorder can display clip names and shot  
1
2
Insert an SxS memory card into  
memory card slot A or B.  
mark names defined in the following languages:  
• English  
• Chinese  
• German  
• French  
Select “Load / Slot(A)” or “Load /  
Slot(B)” of “Plan.Metadata” of the  
OTHERS menu then select “Execute.”  
• Italian  
• Spanish  
• Dutch  
The list of planning metadata files stored on  
the card in the selected slot appears.  
• Portuguese  
• Swedish  
• Norwegian  
• Danish  
Note  
The file list displays up to 64 files.  
Even if the total number of planning  
metadata files is 64 or less, all of the planning  
metadata files may not appear if the directory  
where they are located in the SxS memory  
card (General/Sony/Planning) contains 512  
or more files.  
• Finnish  
Notes  
• If you define clip and shot mark names in  
languages other than those listed above, they  
may not be displayed on the LCD monitor/EVF  
screen.  
• If you define clip and shot mark names in  
French, Dutch, or Finnish, some characters are  
displayed in a different but similar font.  
3
4
Select the planning metadata file to  
load.  
The detailed information in the selected  
planning metadata is displayed.  
Select “Load.”  
The confirmation message “Load Planning  
Metadata File?” is displayed.  
Operating Planning Metadata  
80  
           
a) Material group: A group of clips recorded using  
the same planning metadata.  
5
Select “Execute.”  
Loading of the selected planning metadata  
file begins.  
Use the jog dial to scroll the display.  
To display the file name, assignment ID or clip  
name on the full screen  
When loading ends, the completion message is  
displayed for three seconds.  
When you select “File Name,” “Assign ID,”  
“Title1,” or “Title2” on the PLANNING  
METADATA PROPERTIES screen then press  
the jog dial, the selected item is displayed on the  
full screen. This permits you to check a long file  
or clip name at a glance.  
Press the jog dial again to return to the  
PLANNING METADATA PROPERTIES  
screen.  
Notes  
• After you start loading, do not remove the SxS  
memory card until the completion message is  
displayed.  
• The loaded planning metadata file is retained  
even if the power of the camcorder is turned off  
and turned back on again. However, if you start  
recording immediately after the power is turned  
on, the contents of the planning metadata may  
not be applied to the clip, because the  
Note  
Names of shot marks cannot be displayed on the  
full screen even if you select Shot Mark1 or Shot  
Mark2.  
camcorder gives priority to starting recording.  
Confirming the detailed information in  
planning metadata  
Clearing the loaded planning metadata  
After loading a planning metadata file into  
memory of the camcorder, you can check the  
details of the file, such as the filename, time and  
date of file creation, and the titles specified in the  
file.  
To clear the planning data loaded in the  
camcorder’s memory, proceed as follows:  
1
Select “Clear” of “Plan.Metadata” of  
the OTHERS menu, then select  
“Execute.”  
1
2
Select “Properties” of “Plan.Metadata”  
of the OTHERS menu.  
The confirmation message “Clear Planning  
Metadata File?” is displayed.  
Select “Execute.”  
2
Select “Execute.”  
The PLANNING METADATA  
PROPERTIES (planning metadata detailed  
information) screen appears.  
Clearing begins.  
The following information is displayed:  
When the clearing ends, the completion message  
is displayed for three seconds.  
Item  
Information  
File Name  
Assign ID  
Created  
Filename  
Assignment ID  
Defining a Clip Name in Planning  
Metadata  
Time and date of creation  
Time and date of most recent  
modification  
Modified  
The following two types of clip name strings can  
be written in a planning metadata file.  
• ASCII-format name, which is displayed on the  
EVF screen  
Modified by Name of person who modified the  
file  
Title1  
Title1 specified in file (clip name in  
ASCII format)  
• UTF-8-format name, which is actually  
registered as the clip name  
Title2  
Title2 specified in file (clip name in  
UTF-8 format)  
a)  
Material Gp  
Number of material groups  
You can select the type for displaying the clip  
name with “Clip Name Disp” under  
Shot Mark1 Name defined for Shot Mark 1  
Shot Mark2 Name defined for Shot Mark 2  
“Plan.Metadata” of the OTHERS menu.  
Operating Planning Metadata  
81  
         
When you specify a clip name in planning  
metadata, the name is displayed under the  
operation status indication on the EVF screen.  
exceeds 44 bytes, the string up to the 44th byte  
is used as the clip name. If only a string in  
ASCII format is specified, the ASCII-format  
name up to the 44th characters is used as the clip  
name. When neither the ASCII-format name  
string nor UTF-8-format name string is valid, a  
clip name in the standard format is used.  
Note  
When both an ASCII format name and a UTF-8  
format name are specified in planning metadata,  
the UTF-8 format string is used as the clip name.  
If only either ASCII-format name or UTF-8  
format name is specified in planning metadata,  
the specified name is displayed regardless of the  
menu setting.  
You can use the Sony Planning Metadata Add-in  
application software supplied with the CBK-WA01  
Wi-Fi Adapter to define clip names. For details, refer  
to the Operating Instructions supplied with the CBK-  
WA01.  
Example of clip name strings  
Using a clip name defined in planning  
metadata  
Use a text editor to modify the description for the  
<Title> tag.  
The shaded fields in the example are clip name  
strings. “Typhoon” is described in ASCII format  
(up to 44 characters).  
“Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo” is described in UTF-8  
format (up to 44 bytes).  
1
Load a planning metadata file that  
contains the clip name into memory of  
the camcorder (page 80).  
2
Select “Plan” for “Auto Naming” of  
“Clip” of the OTHERS menu.  
Here, “sp” indicates a space, and 3 indicates a  
carriage return.  
Each time that you record a clip, the  
camcorder automatically generates a name  
consisting of the clip name defined in the  
planning metadata file, with the addition of  
an underscore (_) and a 4-digit serial number  
(0001 to 9999).  
Example: Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_0001,  
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_0002,...  
If the serial number reaches 9999, it returns  
to 0001 upon the next recording.  
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="  
sp  
sp  
UTF-8"?>3  
<PlanningMetadata xmlns="http://  
sp  
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/  
planningmetadata" assignId="  
sp  
P0001" creationDate="  
sp  
2011-08-20T17:00:00+09:00"  
lastUpdate="  
2011-09-28T10:30:00+09:00"  
version="1.00">3  
sp  
sp  
Note  
<Properties propertyId="  
assignment" update="  
sp  
When you load another planning metadata file,  
the serial number returns to 0001.  
sp  
2011-09-28T10:30:00+09:00"  
sp  
To select the clip name display format  
When both an ASCII-format name and a UTF-8-  
format name have been specified, use “Clip Name  
Disp” under “Plan.Metadata” of the OTHERS  
menu to select which one is to display on the LCD  
monitor/EVF screen.  
modifiedBy="Chris">3  
Typhoon  
<Title usAscii="  
"
sp  
sp  
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo  
xml:lang="en">  
</Title>3  
</Properties>3  
</PlanningMetadata>3  
To display the ASCII-format name: Select  
“Title1.”  
Notes  
The clip name becomes  
• When you create a file, enter each statement as  
a single line by breaking a line with a CRLF  
only after the last character of the line, and do  
not enter spaces except where specified with  
“sp.”  
“Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_SerialNumber,” but  
“Typhoon_SerialNumber” is displayed on the  
screen.  
To display the UTF-8 format name: Select  
“Title2.”  
• A string of up to 44 bytes (or 44 characters) is  
valid as a clip name. If a UTF-8-format string  
The clip name becomes  
Operating Planning Metadata  
82  
   
“Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_SerialNumber,” and  
the same name is displayed on the screen.  
<Title usAscii="Football  
sp  
Game" xml:lang="en">  
sp  
Football Game 15/04/2011  
</Title>3  
Note  
For a name specified in Japanese, some characters  
may be displayed in a different font.  
<Meta name="_ShotMark1"  
sp  
sp  
sp  
sp  
sp  
sp  
sp  
sp  
sp  
sp  
sp  
Goal  
content="  
"/>3  
<Meta name="_ShotMark2"  
sp  
Shoot  
content="  
"/>3  
Defining Shot Mark Names in  
Planning Metadata  
<Meta name="_ShotMark3"  
sp  
Corner Kick  
content="  
"/>3  
<Meta name="_ShotMark4"  
sp  
When you use planning metadata to set shot  
marks, you can define names for shot mark 0 to  
shot mark 9. When you record shot marks, you  
can add the shot mark name strings defined in the  
planning metadata.  
Free Kick  
"/>3  
content="  
<Meta name="_ShotMark5"  
sp  
Goal Kick  
content="  
"/>3  
<Meta name="_ShotMark6"  
sp  
Foul  
"/>3  
content="  
<Meta name="_ShotMark7"  
sp  
Note  
PK  
content=" "/>3  
Shot mark 1 and shot mark 2 can be recorded on  
the camcorder. Shot mark 3 to shot mark 9 and  
shot mark 0 can be recorded by operation from a  
computer which is connected with the camcorder  
via Wi-Fi.  
<Meta name="_ShotMark8"  
sp  
1st Half  
content="  
"/>3  
<Meta name="_ShotMark9"  
sp  
2nd Half  
content="  
"/>3  
<Meta name="_ShotMark0"  
sp  
Kick Off  
content="  
"/>3  
Example of shot mark name strings  
</Properties>3  
</PlanningMetadata>3  
Use a text editor to modify the description for the  
<Meta name> tag.  
The shaded fields in the example are shot mark  
name strings.  
Names can be either in ASCII format (up to 32  
characters) or UTF-8 format (up to 16 characters).  
Here, “sp” indicates a space and 3 indicates a  
carriage return.  
Note  
When you create a file, enter each statement as a  
single line by breaking a line with a CRLF only  
after the last character of the line, and do not enter  
spaces except where specified with “sp,” except  
within clip name strings and shot mark name  
strings.  
Note  
You can use the Sony Planning Metadata Add-in  
application software supplied with the CBK-WA01  
Wi-Fi Adapter to define essence mark names. For  
details, refer to the Operating Instructions supplied  
with the CBK-WA01.  
If a name string contains even one non-ASCII  
character, the maximum length of that string is  
limited to 16 characters.  
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="  
sp  
sp  
UTF-8"?>3  
<PlanningMetadata xmlns="http://  
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/  
planningmetadata" assignId="  
Copying Planning Metadata Files  
Collectively  
sp  
sp  
You can copy planning metadata files stored in  
the General folder on an SxS memory card  
collectively to another SxS memory card.  
H00123" creationDate="  
sp  
2011-04-15T08:00:00Z" lastUpdate="  
sp  
2011-04-15T15:00:00Z" version=  
sp  
"1.00">3  
<Properties propertyId=  
"assignment" class="original"  
1
Select “General Files” from “Copy All”  
of the OTHERS menu.  
sp  
sp  
sp  
update="2011-04-15T15:00:00Z"  
modifiedBy="Chris">3  
The confirmation message “Copy General  
Files?” is displayed.  
sp  
Operating Planning Metadata  
83  
     
2
Select “Execute.”  
Copying begins.  
All the planning metadata files stored in the  
General folder on the SxS memory card are  
copied.  
When copying ends, the completion message is  
displayed for three seconds.  
Operating Planning Metadata  
84  
Playback  
Thumbnail Screens  
When you press the THUMBNAIL button, the  
clips recorded on the SxS memory card are  
displayed as thumbnails on the screen. (If no clips  
are recorded on the card, a no-clip message is  
displayed.)  
To return to the camera image  
Press the STOP button to exit the thumbnail  
screen, returning to the E-E picture (or external  
input picture).  
When you press the REC START/STOP button  
on the handle or the grip, recording starts, exiting  
the thumbnail screen.  
THUMBNAIL button  
BARS/CAM  
F REV PLAY/PAUSE F FWD  
j
PREV  
l
G
/S  
J
NEXT  
L
THUMBNAIL  
STOP  
s
You can start playback from the clip selected on  
the thumbnail screen.  
The playback picture can be seen on the LCD  
monitor/viewfinder and external monitors.  
For connection of external monitors, see  
Note  
Even if the SxS memory card contains clips of  
both HD and SD modes, the normal thumbnail  
screen shows only clips of the mode being  
selected at “System” of the OTHERS menu (page  
41).  
To display all recorded clips regardless of the  
mode, switch the screen to the All-Clip thumbnail  
screen (page 88). Note that you cannot start  
playback from the All-Clip thumbnail screen.  
Thumbnail Screens  
85  
     
Configuration of the Thumbnail Screen  
HD mode  
The icon of the current SxS memory card is highlighted, shading the nonselected  
one. (If the card is write-protected, a lock icon is displayed to the left.)  
Current clip No./ Total number of clips  
120  
m
in  
0011 /0300  
Cursor  
(yellow)  
OK  
OK  
01  
01  
01  
/
/
/
JAN 10:53  
JAN 14:53  
JAN 18:53  
01  
01  
01  
/
/
/
JAN 11:53  
JAN 15:53  
JAN 19:53  
01  
01  
01  
/
/
/
JAN 12 :53  
JAN 16 :53  
JAN 20 :53  
01  
01  
01  
/
/
/
JAN 13 :53  
OK  
OK  
OK  
JAN 17 :53  
8
OK  
JAN 21 :53  
01/ JAN / 2011 10 :53 S  
&
Q
Mot ion 29 /24fps TCR 00:00:00:00  
1
7
( )  
JPAN0011 1  
HQ 1920 / 23.9P  
DUR 00:03:19:23  
2
3 4  
5
6
The index frame images of the clips are displayed  
as thumbnails.  
5. Recording video format  
The second digit after the decimal point is not  
displayed.  
The first frame is automatically specified as the  
index frame of a clip when recorded. You can  
change it to another one as required (see page 99).  
The recording date and starting time are displayed  
below the index image of each clip. (The OK  
mark symbol is displayed if the clip is marked.)  
6. Duration of the clip  
7. Timecode  
The timecode of the index frame is displayed.  
8. Special recording information  
If the selected clip was recorded in a special  
recording mode (S&Q Motion, Interval Rec, or  
Frame Rec), the mode is displayed.  
For a clip recorded in S&Q Motion mode,  
[recording frame rate/playback frame rate] fps is  
displayed to the right.  
Data for the clip at the cursor are displayed in 1 to  
8.  
1. Date and starting time of recording  
2. Clip name  
3. OK mark  
Displayed only if the selected clip is marked OK  
4. AV independent file icon  
Displayed if the selected clip is an AV  
independent file. This indicates that the clip is  
an AV independent file, such as those added to  
the memory card using a computer. Not all  
operations and indications may be available for  
such clips.  
Thumbnail Screens  
86  
   
SD mode  
The icon of the current SxS memory card is highlighted, shading the nonselected  
one. (If the card is write-protected, a lock icon is displayed to the left.)  
Current clip No./ Total number of clips  
120  
m
in  
0011 /0300  
JAN 13 :53  
Cursor  
(yellow)  
01  
01  
01  
/
/
/
JAN 10:53  
JAN 14:53  
JAN 18:53  
01  
01  
01  
/
/
/
JAN 11:53  
JAN 15:53  
JAN 19:53  
01  
01  
01  
/
/
/
JAN 12 :53  
JAN 16 :53  
JAN 20 :53  
01  
01  
01  
/
/
/
JAN 17 :53  
7
6
JAN 21 :53  
01/ JAN / 2011 10 : 53 I nterval Rec  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
DUR 00:25:05:00  
1
( )  
JPAN0011 1 / 03  
DVCAM29.9F SQ  
2
3
4
5
The top frame images of the clips are displayed as  
thumbnails.  
6. Timecode  
The timecode of the index frame is displayed.  
The recording date and starting time are displayed  
below the top frame image of each clip.  
For the clips segmented into multiple files  
because their file size exceeded 2GB, a  
symbol is displayed.  
7. Special recording information  
If the selected clip was recorded in a special  
recording mode (Interval Rec or Frame Rec),  
the mode is displayed.  
You can check the segment files on the EXPAND  
CLIP screen (page 98).  
Data for the clip at the cursor are displayed in 1 to  
7.  
1. Date and starting time of recording  
2. Clip name  
Only if the selected clip is a segmented one as  
its file size is over 2GB, the number of  
partitions is displayed after the name, separated  
with a slash.  
3. AV independent file icon  
Displayed if the selected clip is an AV  
independent file. This indicates that the clip is  
an AV independent file, such as those added to  
the memory card using a computer. Not all  
operations and indications may be available for  
such clips.  
4. Recording video format  
The second digit after the decimal point is not  
displayed.  
5. Duration of the clip  
Thumbnail Screens  
87  
Switching the SxS memory cards  
Changing the Type of Thumbnail  
Screen  
When two memory cards are loaded, press the  
SLOT SELECT button to switch memory cards.  
The type of thumbnail screen can be changed by  
pressing the THUMBNAIL button repeatedly.  
Note  
You cannot switch memory cards during  
playback.  
Continuous playback of cards in slots A and B is  
not possible.  
In HD mode  
Each time you press the button, the normal  
thumbnail screen, OK-Clip thumbnail screen, and  
All-Clip thumbnail screen are cyclically  
displayed.  
In SD mode  
Each time you press the button, the normal  
thumbnail screen and All-Clip thumbnail screen  
are alternately displayed.  
Displaying the OK-Clip thumbnail screen  
(HD mode)  
The OK-Clip thumbnail screen shows only the  
clips marked OK among the clips on the current  
SxS memory card.  
Pressing the THUMBNAIL button with the  
normal thumbnail screen displayed displays the  
OK-Clip thumbnail screen.  
For operations of the OK mark in E-E Display mode,  
For operations of the OK mark in Thumbnail Screen  
Displaying the All-Clip thumbnail screen  
The All-Clip thumbnail screen shows all clips  
both of HD and SD modes recorded on the current  
SxS memory card, permitting you to check  
whether the card contains any clips of another  
mode than that currently selected.  
In HD mode, pressing the THUMBNAIL button  
with the OK-Clip thumbnail screen displayed  
displays the All-Clip thumbnail screen.  
In SD mode, pressing the THUMBNAIL button  
with the normal thumbnail screen displayed  
displays the All-Clip thumbnail screen.  
Note  
You cannot start playback from the All-Clip  
thumbnail screen.  
Press the THUMBNAIL button again to return to  
the normal thumbnail screen, and playback and  
clip operations are enabled.  
Thumbnail Screens  
88  
             
Playing Back the Selected and  
Subsequent Clips in Sequence  
Playing Back Clips  
1
Operating the jog dial, move the cursor  
to the thumbnail image of the clip with  
which you wish to start playback.  
For playback operations, use the following  
playback control buttons.  
To move the cursor vertically, hold the  
PICTURE PROFILE button and press the jog  
dial.  
F FWD button  
PLAY/PAUSE button  
F REV button  
2
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.  
Playback starts from the beginning of the  
selected clip.  
BARS/CAM  
F REV PLAY/PAUSE F FWD  
j
PREV  
l
G
/S  
J
NEXT  
L
THUMBNAIL  
STOP  
The clips after the selected clips are played back  
in sequence.  
s
When playback of the last clip ends, the  
camcorder enters PAUSE (still picture) mode at  
the last frame of the last clip.  
Press the THUMBNAIL button to return to the  
thumbnail screen.  
NEXT button  
STOP button  
PREV button  
Notes  
• The playback picture may be momentarily  
distorted or frozen between clips. The playback  
control buttons and THUMBNAIL button do  
not function during this condition.  
• When you select a clip on the thumbnail screen  
and start playback, the playback picture at the  
beginning of the clip may be distorted. To start  
playback without distortion, once pause  
playback after starting it, press the PREV button  
to return to the top of the clip, then restart  
playback.  
SEL/SET  
CANCEL  
B
PICTURE PROFILE  
Information displayed on the playback  
screen  
Jog dial  
PICTURE PROFILE button  
The following information is superimposed on  
the playback picture.  
• When the IR Remote Commander is enabled,  
you can use its playback control buttons instead  
• Use the jog dial when you move the cursor on  
the thumbnail screen or proceed to the next step  
of operations.  
Playing Back Clips  
89  
                 
Monitoring Audio  
1
2
3
4
5
120min  
B PLAY  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
0011/03 00  
In normal playback mode, you can monitor the  
recorded audio signals through the built-in  
speaker or connected headphones.  
CH1  
CH2  
Built-in speaker  
6
1. Battery remaining/DC IN voltage  
2. Playback mode  
3. SxS memory card in use  
A
mark appears if the memory card is write-  
protected.  
4. Time data  
The time data for the playback picture are  
displayed. Each time you press the TC/U-BIT/  
DURATION button, the indication is switched  
between timecode (TCR) and user-bit (UB)  
data.  
MONITOR  
VOLUME  
Headphone  
connector  
5. Clip no./total number of clips on the  
memory card  
MONITOR VOLUME buttons  
6. Audio levels  
The audio levels in recording are displayed.  
With the headphones connected to the headphone  
jack, the built-in speaker is turned off.  
Press the MONITOR VOLUME buttons to adjust  
the sound volume.  
The level bar is displayed during adjustment.  
You can select audio channel(s) to be monitored  
with “Audio Output” (page 114) of the AUDIO  
SET menu.  
Pausing the playback  
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.  
The playback is restarted by pressing the button  
again.  
Stopping playback  
You can stop playback with either of the  
following operations:  
Switching to High-Speed Playback  
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The camcorder permits you to play clips at 4  
times, 15 times or 24 times normal speed in the  
forward or reverse direction. Audio is muffled in  
15-time or 24-time high-speed playback.  
Playback mode is canceled, restoring the  
thumbnail screen.  
Press the STOP button.  
To play at a high speed in the forward direction  
Press the F FWD button.  
Playback mode is canceled, showing the E-E  
picture or any external input.  
Each time you press the button, the playback  
speed switches among 4 times, 15 times and 24-  
times normal speed.  
To display the thumbnail screen, press the  
THUMBNAIL button.  
To play at a high speed in the reverse direction  
Press the F REV button.  
Playing Back Clips  
90  
                           
Each time you press the button, the playback  
speed switches between 4 times, 15 times and 24  
times normal speed.  
Notes  
• No shot mark can be added if the memory card  
is write-protected.  
To return to normal playback  
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.  
• No shot mark can be added to the first or last  
frame of a clip.  
Cueing Up  
To return to the top of the current clip  
Press the PREV button.  
• When you press the button in normal or fast-  
forward playback, the top of the current clip is  
cued up then playback begins.  
• When you press the button in fast-reverse  
playback or in Pause mode, the top of the  
current clip is cued up, then the still picture is  
displayed.  
• Repeated pressing of the button cues up the  
previous clips one by one.  
To start playback from the top of the first clip  
Press the PREV button and F REV button  
simultaneously. The top of the first-recorded clip  
on the memory card is cued up.  
To jump to the top of the next clip  
Press the NEXT button.  
• When you press the button in normal or fast-  
forward playback, the top of the next clip is  
cued up then playback begins.  
• When you press the button in fast-reverse  
playback or in Pause mode, the top of the next  
clip is cued up, then the still picture is displayed.  
• Repeated pressing of the button cues up the  
subsequent clips one by one.  
To start playback from the top of the last clip  
Press the F FWD button and NEXT button  
simultaneously. The top of the last-recorded clip  
on the memory card is cued up.  
Adding Shot Marks During  
Playback (HD Mode)  
In the same manner as in recording, you can add  
shot marks to the clip during playback.  
At the point where you wish to add a shot  
mark, press the “Shot Mark1” or “Shot  
Mark2” assigned button, or the  
SHOTMARK 1 or 2 button on the IR  
Remote Commander.  
Playing Back Clips  
91  
             
Clip Operations  
In Thumbnail Screen mode, you can operate the  
clips or confirm and change the subsidiary data  
for clips using the Clip Operation menus.  
The corresponding Clip Operation menu pops up  
on the screens as shown below.  
Clip Operation Menus  
Thumbnail screen (page 93)  
EXPAND CLIP screen (page 98)  
CANCEL  
CANCEL  
DISP CLIP INFO  
OK MARK ADD  
OK MARK DEL  
COPY CLIP  
EXPAND (COARSE)  
EXPAND (FINE)  
PAUSE  
SET INDEX PIC  
SHOT MARK1 ADD  
SHOT MARK2 ADD  
SHOT MARK1 DEL  
SHOT MARK2 DEL  
DIVIDE CLIP  
DELETE CLIP  
SHOT MARK  
SHOT MARK1  
SHOT MARK2  
EXPAND CLIP  
SHOT MARK screen (page 99)  
CANCEL  
PAUSE  
SET INDEX PIC  
SHOT MARK1 DEL  
SHOT MARK2 DEL  
DIVIDE CLIP  
Note  
Selectable menu items are limited in SD mode.  
Clip Operations  
92  
     
Item  
SHOT  
Function  
Basic Operations of the Clip  
Operation Menus  
To display thumbnails only of the  
frames with shot mark 2 recorded  
1)  
MARK2  
EXPAND CLIP To display the EXPAND CLIP  
Displaying a Clip Operation menu  
screen (page 97) for the clip  
Press the jog dial.  
The Clip Operation menu for the current display  
pops up.  
1)Effective in HD mode only. You cannot select in SD  
mode.  
Selecting a Clip Operation menu item  
Turn the jog dial to select a menu item then press  
the jog dial.  
Pressing the CANCEL button restores the  
previous condition.  
Selecting “CANCEL” from a Clip Operation  
menu turns the Clip Operation menu off.  
Notes  
• When the SxS memory card is write-protected,  
you cannot copy/delete/divide clips, change the  
index frames, and add/delete the OK and shot  
marks.  
• There may be items that cannot be selected  
depending on the status when the menu is  
displayed.  
Clip Operation menu on the thumbnail  
screen  
Pressing the jog dial with the thumbnail screen  
(page 86) displayed calls the Clip Operation  
menu for the clip at the cursor.  
Item  
Function  
DISP CLIP  
INFO  
To display the CLIP INFO screen for  
the clip (page 94)  
OK MARK  
To add the OK mark to the clip (page  
1)  
ADD  
OK MARK  
To delete the OK mark from the clip  
1)  
DELETE  
COPY CLIP  
To copy the clip to another SxS  
memory card (page 95)  
DELETE CLIP To delete the clip (page 96)  
1)  
To display thumbnails only of the  
frames with shot mark 1 and/or shot  
mark 2 recorded (page 98)  
SHOT MARK  
SHOT  
To display thumbnails only of the  
frames with shot mark 1 recorded  
1)  
MARK1  
Clip Operations  
93  
       
Displaying the Detailed Information of a Clip  
When you select “DISP CLIP INFO” from a Clip Operation menu, the CLIP INFO screen appears.  
HD Mode  
120  
m
in  
CLIP I NFO  
0011/0300  
4
( )  
JPAN0011 1 OK  
01 / JAN/2011 10:53  
HQ 1920 /23.98P  
5
6
1
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
S
&Q  
Motion 29/24fps  
TCR 00:05:00:02  
TCR 00:05:00:00 STR  
TCR 00:08:19:23 END  
DUR 00:03:20:00  
CH1/CH2  
2
3
PREV CLIP  
NEXT CLIP  
SD Mode  
120  
m
in  
CLIP I NFO  
0011/0300  
4
( )  
JPAN0011 1 /03  
01 / JAN/2011 10:53  
1
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
DVCAM29.97P SQ  
I nterval Rec  
TCR 00:00:00:00  
TCR 00:00:00:00 STR  
TCR 00:25:05:00 END  
DUR 00:25:05:00  
CH1/CH2  
2
3
PREV CLIP  
NEXT CLIP  
clip name (Long-Display mode). Press the jog  
dial again to cancel Long-Display mode. Long-  
Display mode is also canceled by switching to  
the previous or next clip with the PREV or  
NEXT button.  
1. Image of the current clip  
2. Image of the previous clip  
Press the PREV button to switch to the CLIP  
INFO screen of the previous clip.  
3. Image of the next clip  
Press the NEXT button to switch to the CLIP  
INFO screen of the next clip.  
5. OK mark (HD mode only)  
Displayed only when the selected clip is  
marked OK.  
4. Clip name  
6. Date and starting time of recording  
7. Recording format  
8. Special recording information  
If the selected clip was recorded in a special  
recording mode, S&Q Motion (HD mode only),  
Interval Rec, or Frame Rec, the mode is  
displayed.  
In SD mode, the number of partitions is  
displayed after the name only if the selected clip  
is a segmented one because its file size is  
over 2GB.  
For a clip name of 12 characters or longer, only  
the first 5 and last 5 characters of the name are  
displayed. To check the non-displayed block of  
the name, press the jog dial to display the entire  
Clip Operations  
94  
     
For a clip recorded in S&Q Motion mode,  
[recording frame rate/playback frame rate] fps is  
displayed to the right.  
Copying Clips  
You can copy clips on an SxS memory card to  
another SxS memory card.  
Each clip is copied with the same name to the  
destination SxS memory card.  
9. Timecode of the displayed frame  
10. Timecode at the recording starting point  
11. Timecode at the recording ending point  
12. Duration of the clip  
Notes  
13. Recorded audio channels  
• If there is another clip having the same name on  
the destination SxS memory card, the clip is  
copied under a name adding a single-digit  
number in parentheses to the end of the original  
clip name.  
The parenthetical number is the minimum value  
that does not exist in the destination memory  
card.  
Adding/Deleting the OK Mark to/  
from a Clip (HD Mode Only)  
By adding the OK mark to clips, you can obtain a  
thumbnail screen of only the marked clips when  
you press the THUMBNAIL button.  
Clips with the OK mark cannot be deleted or  
divided. To delete or divide the clip, remove the  
OK mark.  
Examples:  
ABCD0002(1) if ABCD0002 exists  
ABCD0002(2) if ABCD0002(1) exists  
ABCD0005(4) if ABCD0005(3) exists  
• If parenthetical numbers (1) to (9) already exist  
as the result of repeated copying, copying to  
that card cannot be done any more.  
• A warning message is displayed if there is not  
sufficient space on the destination SxS memory  
card. Replace the SxS memory card with one  
with sufficient space.  
• When copying an SxS memory card on which  
multiple clips have been recorded, copying all  
clips to the end may not be achieved, even if the  
destination card has the same capacity as the  
source card, depending on usage conditions,  
memory characteristics, etc.  
Adding the OK mark  
1
2
Select “OK MARK ADD” from the Clip  
Operation menu.  
The CLIP INFO screen for the clip appears  
and a confirmation message appears below  
the index frame.  
Select “Execute,” and press the jog dial.  
The OK mark is applied to the selected clip.  
Deleting the OK mark  
For a clip already marked with OK, the Clip  
Operation menu of the thumbnail screen permits  
you to select “OK MARK DEL.”  
Copying a specified clip  
You can copy a clip selected on the thumbnail  
screen to another SxS memory card.  
1
Select “OK MARK DEL” from the Clip  
Operation menu.  
1
On the thumbnail screen of the current  
memory card, select the clip you wish to  
copy then press the jog dial.  
The information screen for the selected clip  
appears, and a confirmation message is  
displayed below the index frame image.  
The Clip Operation menu of the thumbnail  
screen pops up.  
2
To delete, select “Execute” then press  
the jog dial.  
2
Select “COPY CLIP” from the Clip  
Operation menu.  
The OK mark is deleted from the selected  
clip.  
The information screen of the selected clip  
appears, and a confirmation message is  
displayed below the index frame image.  
Clip Operations  
95  
                     
To cancel copying in progress  
Press the CANCEL button.  
3
To copy, select “Execute” then press the  
jog dial.  
Copying is canceled, and the OTHERS menu  
screen is restored.  
Copying begins.  
An execution message and an in-progress bar are  
displayed during copying.  
When copying ends, the thumbnail screen is  
restored.  
When copying is completed  
The completion message is displayed. When the  
OTHERS menu screen is restored, press the  
MENU button to exit Menu mode.  
To cancel copying on the way  
Press the CANCEL button.  
Copying is canceled and the thumbnail screen is  
restored.  
To copy the clips and planning metadata files  
simultaneously  
Select “Clips&General” for “Copy All” in step 2  
above.  
All files in the General folder that contain  
planning metadata on the SxS memory card are  
copied simultaneously with the clips.  
Copying clips collectively  
By using the Setup menu, you can copy clips on  
an SxS memory card collectively to another SxS  
memory card.  
If the memory card contains clips of both HD and  
SD modes, only the clips of the currently selected  
mode are copied. This may be convenient when  
you wish to extract clips of the same mode only.  
Deleting Clips  
You can delete clips from the SxS memory card.  
Note  
An HD-mode clip marked OK cannot be deleted.  
To delete the clip, first remove the OK mark (see  
1
Press the MENU button when the  
normal thumbnail screen is displayed  
or in the Stop status.  
Deleting a specified clip  
2
Select “Clips” from “Copy All” of the  
OTHERS menu.  
You can delete a clip selected on the thumbnail  
screen.  
O
B
G
THERS  
at tery  
enlock  
I
NFO  
ode  
B
B
:
B
B
B
B
1
2
3
Select the clip you wish to delete on the  
thumbnail screen then press the jog  
dial.  
Tr i gger  
M
Both  
S
C
yste  
l i p  
m
00:00  
Clips  
G e n e r a l F i l e s  
Clips&General  
The Clip Operation menu of the thumbnail  
screen pops up.  
Copy All  
Plan.Metadata  
A confirmation message is displayed.  
Select “DELETE CLIP” from the Clip  
Operation menu.  
Copy All Clips?  
Execute  
The information screen for the selected clip  
appears, and a confirmation message is  
displayed below the index frame image.  
C
ancel  
3
Select “Execute.”  
To delete, select “Execute” then press  
the jog dial.  
Copying begins.  
The clip is deleted.  
The status of progress is displayed during  
copying.  
The subsequent clips are shifted by one on the  
thumbnail screen.  
In HD mode, only the clips of HD mode are  
copied.  
In SD mode, only the clips of SD mode are  
copied.  
Clip Operations  
96  
             
This helps you to quickly cue up to a desired  
scene in a clip of long duration.  
Deleting clips collectively  
By using the Setup menu, you can delete clips  
from an SxS memory card collectively.  
You can display the EXPAND CLIP screen by  
selecting the clip on the thumbnail screen.  
Notes  
1
Select a clip on the thumbnail screen  
then press the jog dial.  
• If the memory card contains clips of both HD  
and SD modes, only the clips of the currently  
selected mode are deleted.  
The corresponding Clip Operation menu  
pops up.  
• HD-mode clips marked OK are not deleted.  
2
Select “EXPAND CLIP” from the Clip  
Operation menu.  
1
Press the MENU button when the  
thumbnail screen of the clips to be  
deleted is displayed.  
The EXPAND CLIP screen appears for the  
clip that you selected on the thumbnail  
screen.  
2
3
4
Select “All Clips DEL” from “Clip” of  
the OTHERS menu.  
EXPAND CLIP screen in HD mode  
Select “Execute.”  
In HD mode, thumbnail images of the first frames  
of 12 blocks equal in duration of a clip are  
displayed on the EXPAND CLIP screen.  
A confirmation message is displayed.  
Select “Execute” again.  
Current frame number  
Deleting begins.  
120  
m
in  
EXPAND CLIP  
01 : 10 :30 :00  
01 : 11 :10 :00  
01 : 11 :50 :00  
0000123  
The status of progress is displayed during  
deleting.  
In HD mode, only the clips of HD mode are  
deleted.  
In SD mode, only the clips of SD mode are  
deleted.  
01:10:20:00  
01:11:00:00  
01:11:40:00  
01 :10 :40 : 00  
01 :11 :20 : 00  
01 :12 :00 : 00  
01 :10 :50 :00  
S1  
S2  
01 :11 :30 :00  
01 :12 : 10 :00  
S2  
S1  
To cancel deleting in progress  
Press the CANCEL button.  
01 /JAN/2011 10:53  
JPAN0011  
S
&Q  
Mot i on 29 /24fps TCR 01:10:20:00  
( )  
1
HQ 1920 /23.9P  
DUR 00:03:19:23  
Deleting is canceled, and the OTHERS menu  
screen is restored.  
1
2
When deleting is completed  
Detailed information for the clip is displayed at  
the bottom of the screen.  
The items other than the following are the same as  
those on the normal thumbnail screen:  
The completion message displayed. When the  
OTHERS menu screen is restored, press the  
MENU button to exit Menu mode.  
1. Frame information  
The following icons show the marking for the  
frame at the cursor.  
Displaying the EXPAND CLIP  
Screen  
Index frame  
In HD mode, the EXPAND CLIP screen permits  
you to divide a clip into 12 blocks of equal  
duration and show a thumbnail image of the first  
frame of each block on the screen.  
In SD mode, the EXPAND CLIP screen shows  
the thumbnail images of the first frames of the  
segment files only for a clip segmented because  
its file size exceeded 2GB.  
Frame with shot mark 1 added  
S1  
Frame with shot mark 2 added  
S2  
The same icons may also be displayed below the  
thumbnail image of each frame. If the frame has  
multiple markings, one of the icons is displayed,  
Clip Operations  
97  
     
in the priority order of index frame, shot mark 1,  
and shot mark 2.  
Item  
Function  
SET INDEX PIC To specify the selected frame for  
the index frame of the clip (page  
2. Timecode indication  
The timecode of the frame at the cursor is  
displayed.  
SHOT MARK1  
ADD  
To add shot mark 1 to the selected  
SHOT MARK2  
ADD  
To add shot mark 2 to the selected  
EXPAND CLIP screen in SD mode  
In SD mode, the thumbnail images of the first  
frames of segment files are displayed for a clip  
segmented because its file size exceeded 2GB on  
the EXPAND CLIP screen.  
SHOT MARK1  
DEL  
To delete shot mark 1 from the  
selected frame (page 99)  
SHOT MARK2  
DEL  
To delete shot mark 2 from the  
selected frame (page 99)  
DIVIDE CLIP  
To divide the clip into two clips at  
the selected frame (page 100)  
Current frame number  
120  
m
in  
EXPAND CLIP  
00 : 09 : 30 : 00  
0000001  
SD mode  
You can select “PAUSE” only on the EXPAND  
CLIP screen in SD mode.  
00 : 00 : 00 : 00  
00:19:00:00  
Displaying the SHOT MARK  
Screen (HD Mode Only)  
01/JAN /2011 10:53  
JPAN0011 _01  
TCR 00 : 00 : 00 : 00  
DUR 00 : 09 : 30 : 00  
DVCAM29.9P SQ  
When one or more shot marks are recorded for a  
single clip in HD mode, the SHOT MARK screen  
permits you to display only the marked frames as  
the thumbnail images on the screen.  
1
2
Detailed information for the clip is displayed at  
the bottom of the screen.  
The items other than the following are the same as  
those on the normal thumbnail screen:  
1
2
Select a clip on the thumbnail screen.  
Press the jog dial.  
1. Timecode indication  
The timecode of the segmentation file at the  
cursor is displayed.  
The Clip Operation menu pops up.  
3
Select “SHOT MARK,” “SHOT  
MARK1,” or “SHOT MARK2.”  
2. Duration  
The duration of the segmentation file at the  
cursor is displayed.  
SHOT MARK: To display thumbnails only  
of the frames marked with shot mark 1  
and/or shot mark 2 recorded  
SHOT MARK1: To display thumbnails only  
of the frames marked with shot mark 1  
SHOT MARK2: To display thumbnails only  
of the frames marked with shot mark 2  
Clip Operation menu on the EXPAND CLIP  
screen  
HD mode  
When you select a frame on the EXPAND CLIP  
screen and press the jog dial, the Clip Operation  
menu pops up to enable further operations.  
Item  
Function  
EXPAND  
(COARSE)  
To decrease the number of  
partitions of the clip  
EXPAND  
(FINE)  
To increase the number of  
partitions of the clip  
To set to Pause mode at the  
selected frame  
PAUSE  
Clip Operations  
98  
               
SHOT MARK screen example  
Adding a shot mark on the EXPAND CLIP  
screen  
120  
m
in  
SHOT MARK  
01 : 10 : 30 : 00  
01 : 11 : 10 : 00  
- - -  
0031 / 0031  
1
Select the frame to which you wish to  
add a shot mark on the EXPAND CLIP  
screen then press the jog dial.  
S1  
S1  
S2  
S1  
S2  
S1  
01:10:50:00  
01 : 10 : 20 : 00  
01 : 11 : 00 : 00  
- - -  
01:10:40:00  
The Clip Operation menu pops up.  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
2
Select “SHOT MARK1 ADD” or  
“SHOT MARK2 ADD” from the Clip  
Operation menu.  
- - -  
01/JAN /2011 10:53  
S
&
Q
Moti on 29 /24fps TCR 01:12:00:00  
( )  
JPAN0011  
1
HQ 1920 /23.9P  
DUR 00:03:19:23  
The information screen for the selected frame  
appears, and a confirmation message is  
displayed below the image.  
1
The detailed information of the clip is displayed  
at the bottom of the screen.  
The items other than the following are the same as  
those on the EXPAND CLIP screen:  
3
Select “Execute.”  
Deleting a shot mark  
1. Timecode indication  
You can delete shot marks on the EXPAND CLIP  
screen (page 97) or on the SHOT MARK screen  
The timecode of the frame at the cursor on the  
SHOT MARK screen is displayed.  
Clip Operation menu on the SHOT MARK  
screen  
1
Select a frame from which you wish to  
delete the shot mark on the EXPAND  
CLIP screen or the SHOT MARK  
screen then press the jog dial.  
When you select a frame on the SHOT MARK  
screen and press the jog dial, the Clip Operation  
menu pops up to permit you further operations.  
The Clip Operation menu pops up.  
Item  
PAUSE  
Function  
To set to Pause mode at the selected  
frame  
2
Select the “SHOT MARK1 DEL” or  
“SHOT MARK2 DEL” from the Clip  
Operation menu.  
SET INDEX PIC To specify the selected frame for the  
index frame of the clip (page 99)  
The information screen for the selected frame  
appears and a confirmation message is  
displayed below the image.  
SHOT MARK1 To delete the shot mark 1 from the  
DEL  
selected frame (page 99)  
SHOT MARK2 To delete the shot mark 2 from the  
DEL  
selected frame (page 99)  
3
Select “Execute.”  
DIVIDE CLIP  
To divide the clip into two clips at  
the selected frame (page 100)  
Changing the Index Frame (HD  
Mode Only)  
Adding/Deleting Shot Marks (HD  
Mode Only)  
In HD mode, you can change the index frame of a  
clip to another frame you selected on the  
EXPAND CLIP screen (page 97) or the SHOT  
MARK screen (page 98).  
In HD mode, you can add shot marks to the clips  
after recording or delete the recorded shot marks.  
1
Select a frame to be the index frame on  
the EXPAND CLIP screen or the SHOT  
MARK screen then press the jog dial.  
Clip Operations  
99  
                 
2
3
Select “SET INDEX PIC” from the Clip  
Operation menu.  
The information screen of the selected frame  
appears and a confirmation message is  
displayed below the image.  
Select “Execute.”  
Note  
Even if you specify a frame other than the top  
frame for the index frame, playback always  
begins from the top frame when you start it from  
the thumbnail screen.  
Dividing a Clip (HD Mode Only)  
In HD mode, you can divide a clip into two  
different clips at the frame you select on the  
EXPAND CLIP screen (page 97) or the SHOT  
MARK screen (page 98).  
1
2
3
Select the frame at which the clip is to  
be divided on the EXPAND CLIP  
screen or the SHOT MARK screen then  
press the jog dial.  
The Clip Operation menu pops up.  
Select “DIVIDE CLIP” from the Clip  
Operation menu.  
The information screen for the selected frame  
appears, and a confirmation message is  
displayed below the image.  
Select “Execute.”  
The selected and subsequent frames are  
divided, creating two clips having different  
names.  
The title block (4 to 46 characters) of the original  
clip name is carried on, continuing to the last  
number on the memory card by the number (4  
digits) of the clip.  
Example: If you divide a clip named ABCD0002  
into two clips under the condition where a  
new clip will be named EFGH0100, clip  
ABCD0100 and clip ABCD0101 are created.  
Note  
If the remaining space on the memory card is  
insufficient for divided clips, a message  
informing you of it appears.  
Clip Operations  
100  
       
Status Displays  
Showing the Status Screens  
This camcorder provides status screens of five  
kinds, permitting you to check the various  
settings and statuses of this unit.  
The status screens can also be displayed on an  
external monitor.  
Switching the status screens  
Operating the jog dial switches the screens in  
sequence.  
Canceling the status screen display  
For connections of an external monitor, see  
Press the STATUS button again. The status  
screen display is canceled.  
(The status screen display is also canceled when  
you change the operation mode of the  
camcorder.)  
Available status screens  
• CAMERA status screen (page 102)  
• AUDIO status screen (page 103)  
• VIDEO status screen (page 104)  
• BUTTON/REMOTE status screen (page 105)  
• BATTERY/MEDIA status screen (page 105)  
Activating the status screen display  
Press the STATUS button.  
Jog dial  
MENU  
A
SEL/SET  
CANCEL  
B
PICTURE PROF  
TC/U-BIT/  
STATUS DURATION  
STATUS button  
Note  
When the expanded focus function is active, the  
status screen display cannot be obtained. Release  
the function then press the STATUS button.  
Showing the Status Screens  
101  
         
Zebra: Zebra status  
Display Contents  
CAMERA Status Screen  
1
This indication becomes “On” if you turn  
zebra on with the ZEBRA button when “1”  
or “Both” is selected for “Zebra Select” of  
the LCD/VF SET menu. The setting value  
of “Zebra1 Level” of the LCD/VF SET  
menu is displayed at the right.  
The settings and statuses related to image  
shooting are displayed.  
It shows “Off” when zebra is off or “2” is  
selected for “Zebra Select.”  
CA  
W
M
ERA  
1/5  
hite Bal B: 12000K  
A : 4700K  
Gain L : 0dB  
M: 9dB  
2
This indication becomes “On” if you turn  
zebra on with the ZEBRA button when “2”  
or “Both” is selected for “Zebra Select” of  
the LCD/VF SET menu.  
It shows “Off” when zebra is off or “1” is  
selected for “Zebra Select.”  
PRST  
:
3200K  
peed: 70  
H: 18dB  
H
andle  
Z
oom  
S
Zebra1:  
2:  
O
O
n
f f  
70%  
Skin Tone  
Pict ure Prof i l e  
D
etai l  
:
:
O
f f  
PP1 STANDARD  
White Bal: White balance status  
Skin Tone Detail: Skin-tone detail status  
The current status (On or Off) of “Setting” of  
“Skin Tone Detail” of the P.PROFILE menu is  
displayed.  
Display Contents  
B
The color temperature stored in white  
memory B is indicated. The color  
temperature of white memory B is detected/  
stored when you execute the auto white  
balance operation in Memory B mode.  
Picture Profile: Picture Profile selection status  
The selected Picture Profile number and name are  
displayed. (If Picture Profile is off, “Off” is  
displayed.)  
A
The color temperature stored in white  
memory A is indicated. The color  
temperature of white memory A is  
detected/stored when you execute the auto  
white balance operation in Memory A  
mode.  
PRST  
The color temperature set as the preset  
white is indicated. The color temperature of  
preset white can be changed using the  
P.PROFILE menu.  
Gain: GAIN switch settings  
The gain values of the positions L, M, and H of  
the GAIN switch assigned with the CAMERA  
SET menu are displayed.  
Handle Zoom Speed  
This function does not operate at present.  
CAMERA Status Screen  
102  
   
Headphones: Headphone output  
The output audio channel(s) for the headphones  
is(are) displayed. The “Monitor CH” setting of  
the AUDIO SET menu is valid as-is.  
AUDIO Status Screen  
Speaker: Speaker output  
Information regarding audio signals is displayed.  
The output audio channel(s) for the built-in  
speaker is(are) displayed. As the speaker is  
monaural, the outputs are CH-1+CH-2 or CH-  
3+CH-4 even in stereo mode.  
With nonstereo settings, the “Monitor CH”  
setting of the AUDIO SET menu is valid as-is.  
AUDIO  
CH-1  
2/5  
CH-2  
oo  
-40  
-30  
-20  
-10  
0
OVER  
W
ind Fi l ter CH-1:  
CH-2:  
O
O
CH-1  
CH-2  
n
n
AGC Link  
eadphones : CH-3 / CH-4  
peaker CH-3+CH-4  
:
Linked  
H
S
EXT-1  
EXT-2  
:
CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4: Audio level meters  
In E-E Display/Recording mode, the levels of the  
CH-1 and CH-2 audio inputs (E-E audio levels)  
are displayed.  
In Playback mode, the playback audio levels of  
CH-1/CH-2 or CH-3/CH-4 are displayed  
according to the “Output CH” setting of the  
AUDIO SET menu.  
If audio input is fed in via the i.LINK (HDV/DV)  
connector in Thumbnail Screen/Pause mode or in  
external input recording, the input audio levels  
are indicated. In this case, the channel indications  
at the left of the meters are CH-1 and CH-2  
regardless of the “Output CH” setting of the  
AUDIO SET menu.  
Wind Filter: Wind filter settings  
The current settings of “Wind Filter CH-1” and  
“Wind Filter CH-2” of the AUDIO SET menu are  
displayed.  
AGC Link: AGC link status  
The “AGC Link” status (Linked or Separate) of  
the AUDIO SET menu is displayed.  
EXT–CH-1/CH-2: Audio input settings  
The inputs to CH-1 and CH-2 according to the  
“EXT CH Select” setting of the AUDIO SET  
menu are displayed.  
EXT CH Select Display  
CH-1/CH-2  
EXT-1  
EXT-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
CH-1  
EXT-1  
EXT-2  
CH-1  
CH-2  
AUDIO Status Screen  
103  
   
Display  
Contents  
SD HDMI P & HDV To output SD HDMI Progressive  
signals from the HDMI OUT  
connector and HDV streams  
from the i.LINK(HDV/DV)  
connector  
VIDEO Status Screen  
The information regarding video signals is  
displayed.  
SD HDMI i & HDV To output SD HDMI interlace  
signals from the HDMI OUT  
connector and HDV streams  
from the i.LINK(HDV/DV)  
connector  
VIDEO  
3/5  
Video For  
Rec ode  
SDI / HD I / i .  
onver ter  
utput  
m
at  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1920x1080/59.94i  
HQ  
M
HD SDI & HDMI  
To output HD SDI signals from  
the SDI OUT connector and SD  
HDMI interlace signals from the  
HDMI OUT connector  
M
L
I
NK I /  
O
S
elect  
SD HD  
M
I
P
&
HDV  
D
o
w
n
C
P
Squeeze  
(
)
23.98  
O
59.94i 2-3  
Off  
P
u l l own  
D
D
D
ual - Link  
ual - Link Video Format  
&
G
a
mma  
Select  
1920x1080/23.98PsF  
P1 709 (800%)  
SD SDI & HDMI i To output SD SDI signals from  
the SDI OUT connector and SD  
S-LOG LUT Select  
:
Video Format: Video format setting  
The video format set in “System” of the OTHERS  
menu is displayed.  
HDMI interlace signals from the  
HDMI OUT connector  
In HD mode, the horizontal resolution, frame rate,  
and scan format are displayed.  
In SD mode, the frame rate, scan format, and  
aspect (SQ/EC) are displayed.  
Down Converter: Down-converter setting of the  
SD output (HD mode only)  
The “Down Converter” setting (Squeeze, Edge  
Crop, Letterbox) of the VIDEO SET menu is  
displayed.  
Rec Mode: Recording bit rate (HD mode only)  
The bit rate (HQ or SP) of the video format set in  
“System” of the OTHERS menu is displayed.  
23.98P Output: 23.98P output mode  
The “23.98P Output” setting (59.94i(2-3  
PullDown) or 23.98PsF) of the VIDEO SET  
menu is displayed.  
SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select: Digital outputs  
The “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” setting of  
the VIDEO SET menu is displayed.  
Dual-Link & Gamma Select: Dual-Link output  
The “Dual-Link & Gamma Select” setting of the  
VIDEO SET menu is displayed.  
Display  
Contents  
HD SDI  
To output HD SDI signals from  
the SDI OUT connector  
Dual-Link Video Format: Video format for Dual-  
Link output  
The video format of the signals fed from the HD  
SD SDI  
To output SD SDI signals from  
the SDI OUT connector  
HD HDMI  
SD HDMI P  
To output HD HDMI signals  
from the HDMI OUT connector  
SDI A/B (Dual-Link) connectors is displayed.  
S-LOG LUT Select: MLUT setting for S-LOG  
output  
The “S-LOG LUT Select” setting of the VIDEO  
To output SD HDMI Progressive  
signals from the HDMI OUT  
connector  
SET menu is displayed.  
SD HDMI i  
To output SD HDMI interlace  
signals from the HDMI OUT  
connector  
SD HDMI i &  
DVCAM  
To output SD HDMI interlace  
signals from the HDMI OUT  
connector and DVCAM streams  
from the i.LINK(HDV/DV)  
connector  
HD HDMI & HDV To output HD HDMI signals  
from the HDMI OUT connector  
and HDV streams from the  
i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector  
VIDEO Status Screen  
104  
   
BUTTON/REMOTE Status  
Screen  
BATTERY/MEDIA Status  
Screen  
The functions assigned to the assignable buttons  
and the status of the IR Remote Commander are  
displayed.  
The information on the battery pack and SxS  
memory cards is displayed.  
BATTERY/  
Bat tery  
M
EDIA  
5/5  
C
harge  
C
ount 55  
BUTTON/RE  
Assign But ton  
M
OTE  
4/5  
HDD  
HDD  
A
B
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
F
L
E
R
reeze  
ast C l i p DEL  
xpanded Focus  
ec Review  
ote  
M
ix  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
F
O
O
reeze  
ff  
ff  
M
ix  
0
0
50  
50  
100  
100  
%
%
M
M
edia  
edia  
A
B
20  
50  
m
m
in  
in  
Li fe 100  
Li fe 10  
%
%
Rec Review  
I R Re  
m
:
On  
Battery: Battery charge remaining  
The remaining charge level of the mounted  
battery pack is displayed.  
Assign Button: Assignable button statuses  
The functions assigned with “Assign Button” of  
the OTHERS menu to the respective assignable  
buttons are displayed.  
Charge Count: Repeated charge times  
The number of times that the mounted battery  
pack has been charged is displayed.  
IR Remote: IR Remote Commander status  
The status (On: enabled, Off: disabled) of the IR  
Remote Commander is displayed  
HDD A/HDD B: Battery remaining of PHU-120R  
units  
When PHU-120R Professional Hard Disk units  
are connected, the remaining power levels of the  
batteries of the PHU-120R units connected via  
the respective card slots are displayed.  
Media A/Media B: Remaining space, available  
recording time, and estimated service life  
(rewriting limit)  
The remaining space of the SxS memory cards in  
the respective card slots is indicated on the  
meters.  
At the right, the available time for recording if  
done at the current bit rate is displayed, in  
minutes.  
The time indication will be “- - min” if no SxS  
memory card or an invalid card is in the slot.  
If the card is write-protected, a  
icon is shown  
to the right of the time indication.  
The Life value is displayed only for an SxS  
memory card which supports the life value  
indication. It indicates the estimated remaining  
usable period of the card (virgin status as 100%).  
If an alarm is generated, make a backup of the  
card as soon as possible and replace it with a new  
card.  
BUTTON/REMOTE Status Screen / BATTERY/MEDIA Status Screen  
105  
       
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings  
Overview of the Setup Menus  
This camcorder permits you to make various  
settings for recording and playback with Setup  
menus on the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.  
Setup Menu Layers  
The Setup menus can also be displayed on an  
external monitor.  
MENU  
CAMERA SET  
Auto Black Bal.  
For connections of an external monitor, see  
Gain Setup  
Shutter  
Slow Shutter  
Color Bar Type  
Flicker Reduce  
Interval Rec  
Frame Rec  
P.Cache Rec  
S&Q Motion  
Rec Review  
TLCS  
Setup Menu Configuration  
The following menu icons are displayed when  
you press the MENU button, permitting you to  
select the corresponding menus.  
CAMERA SET menu  
For setting the items related to recording other  
than those on picture quality (page 110).  
The picture-quality items are set with the P.PROFILE  
menu (page 73).  
Shockless White  
White Switch<B>  
ATW Speed  
Horizontal Inv.  
Lens IF  
AUDIO SET menu  
For setting the audio-related items (page 113).  
AUDIO SET  
VIDEO SET  
Audio Input  
Audio Output  
VIDEO SET menu  
For setting the items related to video outputs  
Input Source Select  
SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select  
SDI/HDMI Out Display  
Video Out Display  
Down Converter  
LCD/VF SET menu  
For setting the items related to the displays on the  
LCD monitor/viewfinder (page 117).  
23.98P Output  
00:00  
Dual-Link & Gamma  
Select  
TC/UB SET menu  
For setting the items related to timecodes and user  
bits (page 120).  
S-Log LUT Select  
SDI Rec Control  
LENS FILE menu  
For setting the items related to lens files (page  
LCD/VF SET  
LCD  
VF  
121).  
Peaking  
Marker  
Zebra  
OTHERS menu  
For setting the other items (page 123).  
Display On/Off  
TC/UB SET  
Timecode  
Users Bit  
TC Format  
(continues)  
Overview of the Setup Menus  
106  
         
LENS FILE  
OTHERS  
Information  
Operation  
Setting  
Basic Menu Operations  
All Reset  
This section covers basic operations for setting  
the Setup menu items.  
Camera Data  
LUT Memory  
3D-Link Mode  
ND Adjustment  
Time Zone  
Clock Set  
Menu controls  
CANCEL button  
Jog dial  
Language  
Assign Button  
Tally  
MENU button  
Hours Meter  
IR Remote  
Battery Alarm  
Battery INFO  
Genlock  
MENU  
A
SEL/SET  
CANCEL  
B
PICTURE PROFILE  
Trigger Mode  
System  
Clip  
Copy All  
Plan.Metadata  
Network  
Wi-Fi  
Option  
InstallOption  
Remove Option  
Format Media  
Version  
Version Up  
S&Q dial  
MENU button  
To turn Menu mode to use Setup menus on/off.  
Jog dial (SEL/SET dial)  
When you turn the dial, the cursor moves up or  
down, permitting you to select menu items or  
setting values.  
CANCEL button  
To return to the previous layer of the menu. An  
uncompleted change is canceled.  
S&Q dial  
When you hold the CANCEL button and press the  
S&Q dial, the S&Q dial enters Jog Dial mode,  
permitting you to select menu items or setting  
values in the same manner as with the jog dial.  
The S&Q dial returns to normal S&Q Dial mode  
if you turn off the power of the camcorder or press  
Basic Menu Operations  
107  
                   
the S&Q dial while holding the CANCEL button  
again.  
CA  
ME  
RA  
SET  
A
uto  
B
lack  
Bal.  
B
B
B
:
Gain Setup  
Shut ter  
Displaying the Setup menu  
00:00  
S
lo  
Color  
F l i cker Reduce  
w
S
hutter  
Press the MENU button.  
B
ar ype  
T
Mul t i  
The menu icons appear on the screen.  
B
Displayed when there are more  
menu items beneath. (v shown at  
the top indicates that there are  
more menu items above.)  
The cursor is displayed on the icon of the menu  
used last, and the corresponding menu item  
selection area is displayed to the right.  
Menu item selection area  
• A B symbol is displayed to the right of any item  
that has subitems.  
Example: When the cursor is located at  
(CAMERA SET menu icon)  
• The current setting value is displayed to the  
right of an item that has no subitems.  
Menu icon  
• To return to the previous layer, select  
.
CA  
MERA  
SET  
A
uto  
B
lack  
Bal.  
B
B
B
:
Gain Setup  
Shut ter  
3
Turn the jog dial to set the cursor to the  
menu item you wish to set then press the  
dial to proceed.  
00:00  
S
lo  
Color  
F l i cker Reduce  
w
S
hutter  
B
ar ype  
T
Mul t i  
B
The setting area appears to the right of the  
menu item selection area, and the cursor  
moves to the top of its subitems.  
Menu item selection area  
Note  
CA  
ME  
RA  
SET  
When the camcorder is in EXPANDED FOCUS  
mode (page 51), the Setup menus cannot be  
operated. Press the EXPANDED FOCUS button  
to release the mode.  
A
uto  
B
lack  
B
al.  
Low  
Mid  
High : 12dB  
:
:
0dB  
6dB  
B
B
B
:
Gain Setup  
Shut ter  
00:00  
S
lo  
Color  
F l i cker Reduce  
w
S
B
hutter  
ar ype  
T
Mul t i  
B
Setting the Setup menus  
Setting area  
• The subitems and their current values are  
displayed.  
• To return to the previous layer, select  
press the CANCEL button.  
1
2
Rotate the jog dial to set the cursor to  
the icon of the menu you wish to set.  
, or  
The selectable menu items are displayed in  
the menu item selection area to the right of  
the icon.  
When you select an item that has no subitems  
and to be only On /Off or switched, the  
choices are displayed to the right of the item.  
In this case, proceed to step 5.  
Press the jog dial.  
The cursor moves to the menu item selection  
area.  
The menu item selection area can show 7  
lines at maximum. When all the selectable  
items cannot be displayed at one time, you  
can scroll the display up or down by moving  
the cursor.  
A triangle appears at the upper or lower right  
corner of the menu item selection area to  
indicate that scrolling is enabled.  
Basic Menu Operations  
108  
temporarily disappears, and a confirmation  
message is displayed. Following the instructions  
of message, specify whether to execute or cancel.  
Example  
CA  
MER  
A
SET  
A
uto  
B
lack  
Bal.  
B
B
B
:
B
Entering a character string  
Gain Setup  
Shut ter  
00:00  
When you select an item for which a character  
string, such as a time value or filename, is to be  
specified, the input area for the character string is  
highlighted, and “SET” appears at the right end.  
S
lo  
Color  
F l i cker Reduce  
w
S
hutter  
Multi  
75%  
100%  
B
ar ype  
T
Choices  
LENS FILE  
4
For the item that has subitems, turn the  
jog dial to set the cursor to the subitem  
you wish to set then press the dial to  
proceed.  
Display  
M
ode  
ory  
ory  
:
D
ate&T  
i
me  
B
B
B
I nf ormat i on  
pera t ion  
Set t i ng  
R
S
R
S
F
F
eca l l  
tore  
eca l l  
t ore  
M
Mem  
S
S
em  
O
xS  
00:00  
1
2
3
xS  
i l e  
i l e  
N
S
a
me  
:
:
0123456789abcdef SET  
ory  
The available values of the selected subitems  
are displayed, and the cursor moves to the  
current value.  
ource  
M
e
m
1
Select characters by turning the jog dial  
then press the dial to proceed.  
CA  
MERA  
SET  
18dB  
12dB  
9dB  
The cursor moves to the next column.  
A
uto  
B
lack  
B
al.  
Low  
Mid  
:
:
B
B
B
:
Gain Setup  
Shut ter  
Perform setting in the same manner up  
to the last column/digit.  
High : 6dB
3dB  
00:00  
S
lo  
Color  
F l i cker Reduce  
w
S
B
hutter  
ar ype  
T
Mul t i  
0dB  
B
-
3dB  
The cursor moves to “SET.”  
Available value area  
Press the jog dial.  
The setting is completed.  
• The available value area can show 7 lines at  
maximum. When all the selectable values  
cannot be displayed at one time, you can  
scroll the display up or down by moving the  
cursor.  
A triangle appears at the upper or lower  
right corner of the available value area to  
indicate that scrolling is enabled.  
Terminating the menu operation  
Press the MENU button.  
The normal camera picture is resumed.  
• For items having a wide range of available  
values (example: –99 to +99), the available  
value area is not displayed. The current  
setting is highlighted instead, indicating  
that the setting is ready for change.  
5
Select the desired value by turning the  
jog dial then press the dial to make the  
setting.  
The setting is changed, and the new setting is  
displayed.  
When you select “Execute” for an execution  
item, the corresponding function is executed.  
For an item that requires your confirmation  
When you select an item that you must confirm  
before execution in step 3, the menu display  
Basic Menu Operations  
109  
 
Setup Menu List  
The functions and available settings of menus are listed below.  
The default settings set at the factory are shown in bold face (example: Speed).  
Note  
The items and setting values that cannot be selected at the time depending on the version of the camcorder,  
the input or output statuses and the setting status of other menu items, are shaded.  
CAMERA SET Menu  
CAMERA SET  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Execute/Cancel Select “Execute” to start the automatic black balance  
Auto Black  
Bal.  
adjustment.  
Adjusting the  
black balance  
automatically  
Low  
–3 / 0 / 3 / 6 / 9 /12 /18 dB  
Mid  
–3 / 0 / 3 / 6 / 9 /12 /18 dB  
High  
–3 / 0 / 3 / 6 / 9 / 12 / 18 dB  
Mode  
Set the gain level to be used when the switch is set to the L  
position.  
Gain Setup  
Assigning gain  
levels to the three  
GAIN switch  
positions  
Set the gain level to be used when the switch is set to the M  
position.  
Set the gain level to be used when the switch is set to the H  
position.  
Select modes of the Electronic Shutter.  
Shutter  
Speed / Angle / ECS  
Specifying  
operating  
Shutter Speed  
Set the shutter speed when Speed mode is selected.  
conditions of the  
electrical shutter  
1/100  
The available setting values vary depending on the frame rate  
of the video format selected (see page 48).  
Shutter Angle  
Set the shutter angle when Angle mode is selected.  
11.25º / 22.5º / 45º / 72º / 86.4º /  
90º / 144º / 150º / 172.8º /180º /  
216.0º  
When the frame rate is set to a value in the range of 1 to 16 in  
Slow & Quick Motion mode, you cannot select 72º, 86.4º, 144º,  
150º, 172.8º, and 216.0º.  
ECS Frequency  
Set the ECS frequency when ECS mode is selected.  
60.00  
The available setting values vary depending on the frame rate  
of the video format selected.  
Setting  
On / Off  
Turn Slow Shutter mode on/off.  
Slow Shutter  
Setting the  
Slow Shutter mode  
Number of Frames  
Set the number of frames to accumulate.  
2 to 8  
Multi / 75% / 100%  
Select the type of color bars displayed when you press the  
BARS/CAM button.  
Multi: To output multiformat color bars  
75%: To output 75% color bars  
Color Bar Type  
Selecting the types  
of color bar  
100%: To output 100% color bars  
Setup Menu List  
110  
               
CAMERA SET  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Mode Set the operation of the Flicker-Reduction function.  
Flicker Reduce  
Setting Flicker  
Compensation  
Auto / On / Off  
On: To always activate it  
Auto: To automatically activate it when flicker is detected.  
Off: To not activate it  
Frequency  
50 Hz / 60 Hz  
Setting  
Set to the power supply frequency of the light source causing  
flicker.  
Turn the Interval Recording function on/off.  
Interval Rec  
Setting the Interval  
Recording  
On / Off  
Interval Time  
Set the interval of recording in Interval Recording.  
function  
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 sec  
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 min  
1 to 4/6/12/24 hour  
Number of Frames  
1 / 3 / 6 / 9 or  
Set the number of frames to be recorded at a time in Interval  
Recording.  
2 / 6 /12 (HQ 1280/59.94P,  
HQ 1280/50P)  
Setting  
On / Off  
Turn the Frame Recording function on/off.  
Frame Rec  
Setting the Frame  
Recording  
Number of Frames  
1 / 3 / 6 / 9 or  
Set the number of frames to be recorded at a time in Frame  
Recording.  
function  
2 / 6 /12 (HQ 1280/59.94P,  
HQ 1280/50P)  
Setting  
On / Off  
Turn the Picture Cache Recording function on/off.  
P.Cache Rec  
Setting the Picture  
Cache Recording  
function  
Rec Time  
0-2sec / 2-4sec / 4-6sec /  
6-8sec / 8-10sec /13-15sec  
Set the time to cache video in the picture cache memory (the  
time to a point where recording is to start when you press a  
recording start button in Picture Cache Recording).  
On Format  
Country: NTSC Area/NTSC(J)  
Area  
Set the recording video format in Slow & Quick Motion  
recording.  
S&Q Motion  
Setting the S&Q  
Motion function  
HQ 1920/29.97P  
HQ 1920/23.98P  
HQ 1280/59.94P  
HQ 1280/29.97P  
HQ 1280/23.98P  
Country: PAL Area  
HQ 1920/25P  
HQ 1280/50P  
HQ 1280/25P  
S&Q Ratio  
Set the recording frame rate in Slow & Quick Motion  
recording.  
With “On Format” at HQ 1920/  
29.97P, HQ 1920/23.98P (NTSC)  
1 to 30  
With “On Format” at HQ 1280/  
59.94P, HQ 1280/29.94P, HQ  
1280/23.98P (NTSC)  
1 to 60 (30)  
With “On Format” at HQ 1920/25P  
(PAL)  
1 to 25  
With “On Format” at HQ 1280/  
50P, HQ 1280/25P (PAL)  
1 to 50 (25)  
Setup Menu List  
111  
         
CAMERA SET  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
3 sec / 10 sec / Clip Set the time to play the last recorded clip using the Rec-  
Rec Review  
Setting the  
Review function.  
3 sec: Last 3 seconds  
10 sec: Last 10 seconds  
Clip: Entire duration of the clip  
playback time for  
Rec-Review  
Level  
+1.0 / +0.5 / 0 / –0.5 / –1.0  
Set the target level (to make brighter or darker) of auto iris  
control in TLCS. (This setting also affects the gain control in  
AGC mode and shutter-speed control in Auto Shutter mode.)  
+1.0: Approx. one stop further open  
+0.5: Approx. half a stop further open  
0: Standard  
TLCS  
Setting the Total  
Level Control  
System (auto  
adjustment system  
of gain, iris and  
shutter)  
–0.5: Approx. half a stop further closed  
–1.0: Approx. one stop further closed  
Note  
Mode  
Set the auto iris control mode in TLCS.  
Backlight: Backlight mode to reduce darkening of the center  
subject against lights  
Standard: Standard mode  
Spotlight: Spotlight mode to reduce blown-out highlights on  
the center subject in the spotlight  
The auto iris  
control function  
does not operate at  
present.  
Backlight / Standard /  
Spotlight  
Speed  
–99 to +99 (+50)  
AGC  
Set the tracing speed of TLCS control.  
Turn the AGC (Auto Gain Control) function on/off.  
Set the maximum gain in AGC.  
On / Off  
AGC Limit  
3 / 6 / 9 / 12 / 18 dB  
AGC Point  
F2.8 / F4 / F5.6  
Set the iris point for switching to auto-iris and auto-shutter  
control when AGC is on.  
Auto Shutter  
Turn the Auto Shutter control function on/off.  
On / Off  
A.SHT Limit  
1/100  
Set the maximum shutter speed in Auto Shutter control.  
1/150  
1/200  
1/250  
A.SHT Point  
F5.6 / F8 / F11 / F16  
Set the iris point for switching auto-iris and auto-shutter  
control when Auto Shutter is on.  
Off / 1 / 2 / 3  
ATW / MEM  
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5  
Select the speed of change in white balance when the white  
balance mode is switched.  
Set to “Off” to instantly change the white balance.  
Select a larger number to change the white balance more  
slowly through interpolation.  
Shockless  
White  
Setting the  
shockless white  
balance  
Select the mode (ATW or Memory B) selected at the B  
position of the WHITE BALANCE switch.  
White Switch  
<B>  
Setting for the  
WHITE  
BALANCE switch  
Set the tracing speed of ATW.  
The larger the number you set, the speed becomes faster.  
ATW Speed  
Setting for Auto  
Tracing White  
Balance  
Setup Menu List  
112  
         
CAMERA SET  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
On / Off  
Set to “On” to horizontally invert the image.  
Horizontal Inv.  
Setting the image  
inversion function  
Type C / Type A / Off  
Select the appropriate lens interface in advance before  
attaching a lens.  
Lens IF  
Selecting the lens  
Type C: For lenses with a Cooke-type connector and those  
supplied with the PMW-F3K  
interface  
Type A: For lenses with a ARRI-type connector  
Off: For other lenses  
AUDIO SET Menu  
AUDIO SET  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
TRIM CH-1  
Finely adjust the sensitivity of channel 1 of microphone input  
Audio Input  
Setting for audio  
inputs  
–20 dBu to –65 dBu (–41 dBu) in steps of 3 dB in Manual audio adjustment mode.  
TRIM CH-2 Finely adjust the sensitivity of channel 2 of microphone input  
–20 dBu to –65 dBu (–41 dBu) in steps of 3 dB in Manual audio adjustment mode.  
Limiter  
Turn the audio limiter on/off.  
On / Off  
MIC AGC  
Select the sensitivity of the microphone inputs.  
High / Low  
AGC Link  
Linked / Separated  
Select the gain link condition when the audio level adjustment  
is in AGC mode.  
Linked: To vary the CH-1 gain and the CH-2 gain in  
synchronization.  
Separated: To vary the CH-1 gain and the CH-2 gain  
independently according to the respective levels.  
1KHz Tone  
On / Off  
Turn the 1-kHz reference tone signal on/off.  
Turn the wind filter for channel 1 on/off.  
Turn the wind filter for channel 2 on/off.  
Wind Filter CH-1  
On / Off  
Wind Filter CH-2  
On / Off  
EXT CH Select  
CH-1  
CH-1: To record channel 1 audio input on both channels 1  
and 2.  
CH-1/CH-2  
It is recommended to set the AUDIO SELECT (AUTO/  
MANUAL) switch and AUDIO LEVEL control for CH-2  
(page 56) as well as the above TRIM CH-2 to the same  
conditions as those for CH-1.  
CH-1/CH-2: To record channel 1 and channel 2 inputs on the  
respective channels.  
Setup Menu List  
113  
         
AUDIO SET  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Monitor CH  
Select the audio channel(s) to be fed to the headphones and  
the built-in speaker.  
CH-1/CH-2 (CH-3/CH-4): Stereo  
CH-1+CH-2 (CH-3+CH-4): Mix  
CH-1 (CH-3): CH-1 (CH-3) only  
CH-2 (CH-4): CH-2 (CH-4) only  
Audio Output  
Setting for audio  
outputs  
CH-1/CH-2 (CH-3/CH-4)  
CH-1+CH-2 (CH-3+CH-4)  
CH-1 (CH-3)  
CH-2 (CH-4)  
(
): with “Output CH” set to “CH-3/CH-4”  
Output CH  
CH-1/CH-2  
CH-3/CH-4  
Select audio output channels from either channels 1 and 2 or  
channels 3 and 4.  
Alarm Level  
Set the alarm sound volume.  
0 to 7 (4)  
Beep  
Select whether or not to sound a beep upon each operation.  
On / Off  
Setup Menu List  
114  
 
VIDEO SET Menu  
VIDEO SET  
Menu items  
Setting values  
Contents  
Camera / i.LINK  
Select video and audio signal for the input source.  
Camera: Camera image  
Input Source  
Select  
i.LINK: HDV/DVCAM input via the i.LINK(HDV/DV)  
connector  
Setting the input  
source  
Note  
DVCAM input is for display only and cannot be recorded.  
• When “Dual-Link & Gamma  
Select” is not set to “Off”  
With a video format of HQ 1920/  
HQ 1440/HQ 1280:  
HD SDI  
HD SDI: To output HD SDI signals from the SDI OUT  
connector.  
SD SDI: To output SD SDI signals from the SDI OUT  
connector  
HD HDMI: To output HD HDMI signals from the HDMI  
OUT connector  
SDI/HDMI/  
i.LINK I/O  
Select  
Selecting input/  
output signals for  
the connectors  
SD SDI  
HD HDMI  
SD HDMI P  
SD HDMI P: To output SD HDMI Progressive signals from  
the HDMI OUT connector  
SD HDMI i  
SD HDMI i: To output SD HDMI interlace signals from the  
HDMI OUT connector  
SD HDMI i & DVCAM  
With a video format of SP 1440:  
HD SDI  
SD HDMI i & DVCAM: To output SD HDMI interlace  
signals from the HDMI OUT connector and DVCAM  
streams from the i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector  
HD HDMI & HDV: To output HD HDMI signals from the  
HDMI OUT connector and HDV streams from the  
i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector  
SD HDMI P & HDV: To output SD HDMI Progressive  
signals from the HDMI OUT connector and HDV streams  
from the i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector  
SD SDI  
HD HDMI & HDV  
SD HDMI P & HDV  
SD HDMI i & HDV  
SD HDMI i & DVCAM  
With a video format of DVCAM:  
SD SDI  
SD HDMI i & DVCAM  
SD HDMI i & HDV: To output SD HDMI interlace signals  
from the HDMI OUT connector and HDV streams from  
the i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector  
HD SDI & HDMI: To output HD SDI signals from the SDI  
OUT connector and SD HDMI interlace signals from the  
HDMI OUT connector.  
SD SDI & HDMI i: To output SD SDI signals from the SDI  
OUT connector and SD HDMI interlace signals from the  
HDMI OUT connector.  
• When “Dual-Link & Gamma  
Select” is set to “Off”  
With a video format of HQ 1920/  
HQ 1440/HQ 1280:  
HD SDI & HDMI  
SD SDI & HDMI i  
HD HDMI  
SD HDMI P  
SD HDMI i  
Notes  
• No signal is output from the SDI OUT connector with any  
setting other than “HD SDI” and “SD SDI.”  
• Slow & Quick Motion mode cannot be used with a setting  
for inputting/outputting a DVCAM stream.  
SD HDMI i & DVCAM  
With a video format of SP 1440:  
HD SDI & HDMI  
SD SDI & HDMI i  
HD HDMI & HDV  
SD HDMI P & HDV  
SD HDMI i & HDV  
SD HDMI i & DVCAM  
With a video format of DVCAM:  
SD SDI & HDMI i  
SD HDMI i & DVCAM  
Setup Menu List  
115  
         
VIDEO SET  
Menu items  
Setting values  
Contents  
On / Off  
Set whether to add the same menus and status indications as  
those on the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen to the output  
signals from the SDI OUT and HDMI OUT connectors.  
SDI/HDMI Out  
Display  
Setting the  
character  
information for  
digital outputs  
Note  
On the thumbnail, EXPAND CLIP and SHOT MARK  
screens, the same menus and status indications as those on the  
LCD monitor/viewfinder screen are displayed regardless of  
the setting of this item.  
On / Off  
Set whether to add the same menus and status indications as  
those on the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen to the output  
signal from the VIDEO OUT connector.  
Video Out  
Display  
Setting the  
character  
information for the  
composite output  
Note  
On the thumbnail, EXPAND CLIP and SHOT MARK  
screens, the same menus and status indications as those on the  
LCD monitor/viewfinder screen are displayed regardless of  
the setting of this item.  
Squeeze / Letterbox / Edge  
Crop  
Set the output mode (aspect) for SD signals  
Squeeze: To horizontally reduce a 16:9 picture to output a 4:3  
picture  
Letterbox: To mask the upper and lower areas of a 4:3 picture  
to display a 16:9 picture in the center of the screen  
Edge Crop: To cut the both sides of a 16:9 picture to output a  
4:3 picture  
Down  
Converter  
Selecting the  
operation mode of  
the down converter  
59.94i (2-3PullDown)/  
23.98PsF  
Select the video output format when the video format is HQ  
1920/23.98P or HQ 1440/23.98P (invalid with video formats  
other than HQ 1920/23.98P and HQ 1440/23.98P).  
23.98P Output  
Selecting Output  
mode  
Off / 1.5G YPbPr422 & Video Set the output from the HD SDI A/B connectors.  
Off: No signal output  
Dual-Link &  
Gamma Select  
Setting the dual-  
link output  
1.5G YPbPr422 & Video: To output 1.5G Dual-Link HD-SDI  
signal using both the A and B connectors.  
Note  
The following choices become available when the CBK-  
RGB01 RGB and S-LOG Output Option is installed.  
1.5G RGB444 & Video  
1.5G RGB444 & S-Log  
3G YPbPr422 & Video  
3G RGB444 & Video  
3G RGB444 & S-Log  
Off /  
Select the MLUT (Monitor Look Up Table) to be applied to  
the video signals with S-LOG except for the signals of Dual-  
Link output (signals recorded on the camcorder, and signals  
output from the SDI output, HDMI output, Video output, and  
i-LINK output)  
Off: MLUT not applied (original S-LOG is output)  
709 (800%): Gamma 709 with 800% dynamic range  
HG8009G40: Hypergamma with 800% dynamic range  
HG8009G33: Hypergamma with 800% dynamic range  
709 (180%): Gamma 709 with 800% dynamic range  
S-LOG LUT  
Select  
Setting the MLUT  
P1: 709 (800%) /  
P2: HG8009G40 /  
P3: HG8009G33 /  
P4: 709 (180%) /  
U1: 709 (180%) /  
U2: 709 (180%) /  
U3: 709 (180%) /  
U4: 709 (180%) /  
U5: 709 (180%)  
for S-LOG output  
Setup Menu List  
116  
             
VIDEO SET  
Menu items  
Setting values  
Contents  
Off / HD SDI Remote I/F  
To turn the function to enabling recording synchronized with  
this camcorder.  
SDI Rec  
Control  
HD SDI Remote I/F: To feed a REC trigger signal to a  
recorder connected to the SDI OUT and HD SDI A/B  
connectors.  
Setting the  
synchronized  
recording  
LCD/VF SET Menu  
LCD/VF SET  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Color  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Contrast  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Brightness  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Backlight  
High / Low  
Mode  
Color / B&W  
Adjust the color of pictures on the LCD monitor.  
Adjust the contrast of pictures on the LCD monitor.  
Adjust the brightness of pictures on the LCD monitor.  
Select the brightness of the viewfinder backlight.  
LCD  
Adjusting the LCD  
monitor  
VF  
Setting the  
viewfinder  
Select the display mode of the viewfinder in E-E Display/  
Recording mode.  
Color: Color mode  
B&W: Monochrome mode  
Contrast  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Brightness  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Power  
Auto / On  
Adjust the contrast of pictures on the viewfinder screen.  
Adjust the brightness of pictures on the viewfinder screen.  
Set the condition to turn the viewfinder on.  
Auto: To turn it on when the LCD monitor is closed or rotated  
to the upside-down position  
On: To keep it on regardless of the status of the LCD monitor  
Color  
White / Red / Yellow / Blue  
Level  
High / Mid / Low  
Select the color of the peaking signal.  
Peaking  
Setting the peaking  
function for the  
LCD monitor/  
viewfinder  
Set the level of the peaking signal.  
Setup Menu List  
117  
           
LCD/VF SET  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Setting Turn all marker indications on/off in combination.  
On / Off  
Marker  
Setting the  
markers added to  
pictures on the  
LCD monitor/  
viewfinder screen  
Safety Zone  
On / Off  
Turn the safety marker on/off.  
Safety Area  
80% / 90% / 92.5% / 95%  
Select the size (ratio to the entire screen) of the safety zone  
marker.  
Center Marker  
Turn the center marker on/off.  
On / Off  
Aspect Marker  
Select the aspect marker.  
Line / Mask / Off  
Line: To show white lines  
Mask: To lower the video signal level of areas outside the  
marker range.  
Off: To not display  
Aspect Select  
Select the ratio of the aspect marker.  
4:3 / 13:9 / 14:9 / 15:9 / 1.66:1 /  
1.85:1 / 2.35:1 / 2.4:1  
Aspect Mask  
When “Aspect Marker” is “Mask,” select the brightness of  
90% / 80% / 70% / 60% / 50% / images outside the aspect marker.  
40% / 30% / 20% / 10% / 0%  
Guide Frame  
Turn the guide frame marker on/off.  
On / Off  
Zebra Select  
1 / 2 / Both  
Select the zebra pattern(s) to be displayed.  
1: To display zebra 1 only  
Zebra  
Setting the zebra  
2: To display zebra 2 only  
pattern  
Both: To display both zebra 1 and zebra 2  
Zebra1 Level  
Set the display level of zebra 1.  
50 to 107 (70)  
Setup Menu List  
118  
   
LCD/VF SET  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Video Level Warnings  
On / Off  
Turn the warning indication to be displayed when the picture  
is too bright or too dark on/off.  
Display On/Off  
Selecting the items  
to be displayed on  
the LCD monitor/  
viewfinder screen  
Brightness Display  
On / Off  
Turn the numeric indication to show the picture brightness on/  
off.  
Histogram Display  
On / Off  
Turn the histogram indication to show the level distribution of  
the picture on/off.  
Lens Info  
Meter / Feet / Off  
Select the depth-of-field indication.  
Meter: To indicate in meters  
Feet: To indicate in feet  
Off: To not indicate  
Zoom Position  
Number / Bar / Off  
Select the type of zoom position indication.  
Number: Indication with a number  
Bar: Indication with a bar  
Off: To not display  
Audio Level Meter  
Turn the audio level meter indication on/off.  
On / Off  
Timecode  
On / Off  
Turn the time data (timecode, user bits, duration) indication  
on/off.  
Battery Remain  
On / Off  
Turn the battery remaining/DC input voltage indication on/  
off.  
Media Remain  
Turn the media remaining indication on/off.  
On / Off  
TLCS Mode  
Turn the TLCS mode indication on/off.  
On / Off  
White Balance Mode  
Turn the white balance mode indication on/off.  
On / Off  
Picture Profile/S-Log  
On / Off  
Turn the Picture Profile indication and S-Log indication on/  
off.  
Filter Position  
Turn the ND filter setting indication on/off.  
On / Off  
Iris Position  
Turn the iris setting indication on/off.  
On / Off  
Gain Setting  
dB / ISO / Off  
Select the type of gain setting indication.  
dB: To indicate in dB  
ISO: To indicate in an ISO value  
Off: To not display  
Shutter Setting  
Turn the shutter mode and speed indication on/off.  
On / Off  
Rec Mode  
On / Off  
Turn the special recording mode (Frame Rec, Interval Rec,  
S&Q Motion) indication on/off.  
Video Format  
Turn the video format indication on/off.  
On / Off  
5600K CC  
On / Off  
Turn the electric color compensation filter indication on/off.  
Turn the S-LOG MLUT indication on/off.  
Note  
The 3D-Link  
S-Log LUT Select  
Mode does not  
operate at present.  
On / Off  
3D-Link Mode  
On / Off  
Turn the 3D-Link operation mode indication on/off when 3D-  
Link is enabled.  
Setup Menu List  
119  
 
TC/UB SET Menu  
TC/UB SET  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Mode  
Preset / Regen / Clock  
Set the timecode mode.  
Timecode  
Setting the  
timecode  
Preset: To start the timecode from the specified value  
Regen (regeneration): To continue the timecode from that of  
the previous clip  
Clock: To use the current clock time as the timecode  
Run  
Rec Run / Free Run  
Set the running mode when the timecode mode is set to  
“Preset.”  
Rec Run: The timecode advances only in recording mode.  
Free Run: The timecode keeps advancing regardless of  
recording.  
Setting  
Reset  
Set the timecode to a desired value.  
Select “SET” to finish the setting.  
Select “Execute” to reset the timecode to 00:00:00:00.  
Execute / Cancel  
TC Out  
Auto / Generator  
Select the timecode output.  
Auto: To output the timecode generator value during  
recording, and the timecode reader value during playback.  
Generator: To output the timecode generator value during  
recording or playback.  
Mode  
Fix / Date  
Set the user bit mode.  
Fix: To use a desired fixed value as the user bits  
Date: To use the current date  
Users Bit  
Setting the user  
bits  
Setting  
DF / NDF  
Set the user bits to a desired value.  
Set the timecode format.  
DF: Drop frame  
TC Format  
Setting the  
NDF: Non drop frame  
timecode format  
Setup Menu List  
120  
         
LENS FILE Menu  
LENS FILE  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Lens Name  
Manufacturer  
Serial Number  
Version  
The model name of the lens is displayed.  
The manufacturer of the lens is displayed.  
The serial number of the lens is displayed.  
The version of the lens is displayed.  
Information  
Displaying the  
information for the  
attached lens  
(serial lenses only)  
Display Mode  
Date&Time / Model Name /  
Lens Name  
Set the mode of the display for lens file selection.  
Date&Time: To display the date and time when the lens files  
have been stored.  
Operation  
Operating lens  
files  
Model Name: To display the name of the device with which  
the lens files have been stored.  
Lens Name: To display the name of the lens.  
Recall Memory  
Execute/Cancel  
Select “Execute” to retrieve a lens file from the built-in  
memory.  
Store Memory  
Execute/Cancel  
Select “Execute” to store a lens file in the built-in memory.  
Recall SxS  
Execute/Cancel  
Select “Execute” to retrieve a lens file from an SxS memory  
card.  
Store SxS  
Select “Execute” to store a lens file in an SxS memory card.  
Execute/Cancel  
File Name  
No Offset  
Set the filename (max. 16 characters) of the lens file being  
selected. Turn the jog dial to select a character then push the  
dial to proceed.  
Selectable characters: a to z (lower case), A to Z (upper case),  
0 to 9, space, and the following characters:  
!#$%&’()*+,-./:;<=>@[¥]~  
File Source  
The file number of the file being selected is displayed.  
Auto Recall  
Off / On (Lens Name) / On  
(Serial Number)  
Specify whether to automatically retrieve the lens file for the  
mounted lens that supports serial communication.  
Off: To not use  
On (Lens Name): To retrieve the lens file corresponding to the  
model name of the lens and reflect the contents of the file.  
On (Serial Number): To retrieve the lens file corresponding to  
the model name and serial number of the lens and reflect  
the contents of the file. (If the lens does not support serial  
number communication, the file corresponding with the  
model name is retrieved.)  
Setup Menu List  
121  
       
LENS FILE  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Reset Setting  
Select “Execute” to clear the lens compensation data to the  
Setting  
Execute/Cancel  
factory-set values.  
Performing  
adjustments for a  
lens file  
Flare R  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Set an R flare level in the lens file.  
Flare G  
Set a G flare level in the lens file.  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Flare B  
Set a B flare level in the lens file.  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
White Offset R  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Set an R white balance compensation value in the lens file.  
Set a B white balance compensation value in the lens file.  
White Offset B  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Shading R H SAW  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Set an R horizontal SAW white shading compensation value  
in the lens file.  
Shading R H PARA  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Set an R horizontal PARA white shading compensation value  
in the lens file.  
Shading R V SAW  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Set an R vertical SAW white shading compensation value in  
the lens file.  
Shading R V PARA  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Set an R vertical PARA white shading compensation value in  
the lens file.  
Shading G H SAW  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Set a G horizontal SAW white shading compensation value in  
the lens file.  
Shading G H PARA  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Set a G horizontal PARA white shading compensation value  
in the lens file.  
Shading G V SAW  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Set a G vertical SAW white shading compensation value in  
the lens file.  
Shading G V PARA  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Set a G vertical PARA white shading compensation value in  
the lens file.  
Shading B H SAW  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Set a B horizontal SAW white shading compensation value in  
the lens file.  
Shading B H PARA  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Set a B horizontal PARA white shading compensation value  
in the lens file.  
Shading B V SAW  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Set a B vertical SAW white shading compensation value in  
the lens file.  
Shading B V PARA  
–99 to +99 ( 0)  
Set a B vertical PARA white shading compensation value in  
the lens file.  
Setup Menu List  
122  
OTHERS Menu  
OTHERS  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Execute/Cancel  
Select “Execute” to reset the camcorder to the factory status.  
All Reset  
Resetting to the  
factory status  
Store  
Execute/Cancel  
Recall  
Execute/Cancel  
Store  
Execute/Cancel  
Recall  
Select “Execute” to store the setting values in an SxS memory  
card.  
Camera Data  
Storing/recalling  
the menu settings  
Select “Execute” to retrieve the setting values from an SxS  
memory card.  
Select “Execute” to store five user LUT data on an SxS  
memory card collectively.  
LUT Memory  
Storing/recalling  
user LUT data  
Select “Execute” to recall five user LUT data from an SxS  
memory card collectively.  
Execute/Cancel  
Off / Main(L) / Sub(R)  
Set the 3D-Link operation mode.  
Off: 3D-Link is not used.  
Main (L): To control the sub unit (for left).  
Sub (R): To be controlled by the main unit (for right).  
3D-Link Mode  
Setting the 3D-  
Link mode  
Note  
3D-Link Mode  
does not operate at  
present.  
ND Clear  
0 to 999  
Adjust the user adjustment value when the ND filter is set to  
“Clear.”  
ND  
Adjustment  
Setting the  
sensitivity of ND  
filter  
ND 1(1/8)  
0 to 999  
Adjust the user adjustment value when the ND filter is set to  
“ND 1 (1/8).”  
ND 2(1/64)  
0 to 999  
Adjust the user adjustment value when the ND filter is set to  
“ND 2 (1/64).”  
Note  
ND Adjustment  
does not operate at  
present.  
UTC –12:00 to +14:00  
(UTC)  
Set the time-zone difference from UTC in steps of 30  
minutes.  
Time Zone  
Setting the time  
difference  
Date/Time  
Set the current time and date.  
Clock Set  
Setting the built-in  
clock  
12H/24H  
12H / 24H  
Select the display mode of time.  
12H: 12-hour mode  
24H: 24-hour mode  
Date Mode  
Select the display mode of the date.  
YYMMDD / MMDDYY /  
DDMMYY  
YYMMDD: In sequence of year, month, day  
MMDDYY: In sequence of month, day, year  
DDMMYY: In sequence of day, month, year  
English / Chinese / Japanese  
English: To display in English  
Chinese: To display in Chinese  
Japanese: To display in Japanese  
Language  
Selecting the  
language for  
menus and  
messages  
Note  
“Japanese” is effective only on messages for warning and  
caution. The menus and status indications do not change.  
Setup Menu List  
123  
                   
OTHERS  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
<1> to <8> Assign a function to the ASSIGN button of the corresponding  
Off / Marker / Last Clip DEL / number.  
ATW / ATW Hold / Rec Review Marker: For turning the markers on/off  
Assign Button  
Assigning  
functions to the  
assignable buttons  
/ Rec / Picture Cache / Freeze  
Mix / Expanded Focus /  
Last Clip DEL: For deleting the last recorded clip  
ATW: For turning ATW on/off  
Spotlight / Backlight / IR  
Remote / Shot Mark1 / Shot  
ATW Hold: For holding the ATW value  
Rec Review: For starting a Rec Review  
Mark2 / VF Mode / BRT Disp / Rec: For starting/stopping recording  
Histogram / Lens Info / OK  
Mark / LCD /VF Adjust  
Picture Cache: For turning picture caching on/off  
Freeze Mix: For executing Freeze Mix  
Expanded Focus: For turning Expanded Focus on/off  
Spotlight: For selecting TLCS Spotlight mode  
Backlight: For selecting TLCS Backlight mode  
IR Remote: For activating/deactivating the IR Remote  
Commander  
<1> Lens Info  
<2> BRT Disp  
<3> Histogram  
<4> Rec  
<5> Rec  
<6> Off  
<7> Off  
<8> Off  
Shot Mark1: For adding shot mark 1 (HD mode only)  
Shot Mark2: For adding shot mark 2 (HD mode only)  
VF Mode: For switching between color and monochrome  
modes of the viewfinder  
BRT Disp: For turning the brightness level indication on/off  
Histogram: For turning the histogram indication on/off  
Lens Info: For turning the depth-of-field indication on/off  
OK Mark: For adding an OK mark (HD mode only, not valid  
in thumbnail display/playback status)  
LCD/VF Adjust: For turning the brightness/contrast level bar  
indication on/off  
Off: No function  
Front  
High / Low / Off  
Set the brightness of the tally lamp on the front.  
High: To brighten the lamp  
Tally  
Setting the tally  
Low: To dim the lamp  
lamps  
Off: To not light the lamp  
Rear  
Turn the tally lamp on the rear on/off.  
On / Off  
Hours (Sys)  
Hours (Reset)  
The non-resettable accumulated time of use is displayed.  
The resettable accumulated time of use is displayed.  
Select “Execute” to reset the Hours (Reset) value to 0.  
Hours Meter  
Displaying the  
hours meter  
Reset  
Execute/Cancel  
On / Off  
Set to “On” to activate remote control operations from the  
supplied IR Remote Commander.  
IR Remote  
Activating/  
deactivating the  
Remote  
Note  
The setting automatically returns to “Off” when the  
camcorder is turned off.  
Commander  
Low BATT  
5% / 10% / 15% / ... / 45% /  
50%  
Set the battery level at which the Low BATT warning is  
generated (in steps of 5%).  
Battery Alarm  
Setting the low  
power alarm  
BATT Empty  
3% to 7%  
Set the battery level at which the BATT Empty warning is  
generated.  
DC Low Volt1  
11.5 V to 17.0 V  
Set the DC IN voltage at which the DC Low Volt1 warning is  
generated.  
DC Low Volt2  
11.0 V to 14.0 V  
Set the DC IN voltage at which the DC Low Volt2 warning is  
generated.  
Setup Menu List  
124  
         
OTHERS  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Type  
The type (product name) is displayed.  
Battery INFO  
Showing  
information  
regarding the  
battery pack  
(display only)  
MFG Date  
Charge Count  
The date of manufacture is displayed.  
The accumulated number of times of charge/discharge is  
displayed.  
Capacity  
Voltage  
The estimated total capacity of full charge is displayed.  
The current output voltage is displayed.  
Remaining  
The current remaining level is displayed.  
H Phase (HD)  
–999 to +999 ( 0)  
Set the H phase (phase of the horizontal sync signal) of HD  
signal for genlock operation.  
Genlock  
Setting Genlock  
operation  
H Phase (SD)  
–999 to +999 ( 0)  
Set the H phase (phase of the horizontal sync signal) of SD  
signal for genlock operation.  
Internal / Both / External  
Internal: To activate recording start/stop operations only for  
an SxS memory card in a built-in slot.  
Both: To activate recording start/stop operations both for an  
SxS memory card in a built-in slot and the external  
recording device connected via the i.LINK(HDV/DV)  
connector.  
External: To activate recording start/stop operations only for  
the external recording device connected via the  
i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector.  
Trigger Mode  
Setting whether to  
trigger recording  
start/stop for an  
external device  
connected to via  
the i.LINK(HDV/  
DV) connector  
Setup Menu List  
125  
     
OTHERS  
Menu items  
System  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Country Select the area of use and setup ON/OFF.  
NTSC Area / NTSC(J) Area / NTSC Area: Setup ON  
PAL Area  
NTSC(J) Area: Setup OFF  
PAL Area: Setup OFF  
HD/SD  
HD / SD  
Switch between HD mode and SD mode for recording/  
playback.  
Select “Execute” to switch.  
Video Format  
HD mode  
Select the video format for recording.  
HD mode  
Country: NTSC Area/ NTSC(J)  
Area  
• Bit rate  
HQ or SP  
HQ 1920/59.94i  
HQ 1920/29.97P  
HQ 1920/23.98P  
HQ 1440/59.94i  
HQ 1440/29.97P  
HQ 1440/23.98P  
SP 1440/59.94i  
SP 1440/23.98P  
HQ 1280/59.94P  
HQ 1280/29.97P  
HQ 1280/23.98P  
Country: PAL Area  
HQ 1920/50i  
• Horizontal resolution  
1920, 1440, or 1280  
• Frame rate  
23.98, 25, 29.97, 50, or 59.94  
• Scan system  
i (interlace) or P (progressive)  
SD mode  
• Frame rate  
25, 29.97, 50, or 59.94  
• Scan system  
i (interlace) or P (progressive)  
• Aspect  
SQ (Squeeze) or EC (Edge Crop)  
HQ 1920/25P  
HQ 1440/50i  
HQ 1440/25P  
SP 1440/50i  
HQ 1280/50P  
HQ 1280/25P  
SD mode  
Country: NTSC Area/ NTSC(J)  
Area  
DVCAM59.94i SQ  
DVCAM59.94i EC  
DVCAM29.97P SQ  
DVCAM29.97P EC  
Country: PAL Area  
DVCAM50i SQ  
DVCAM50i EC  
DVCAM25P SQ  
DVCAM25P EC  
Setup Menu List  
126  
 
OTHERS  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Auto Naming  
Select the method to specify clip names.  
Clip  
Title / Plan  
Title: To specify as desired by “Title Prefix”  
Plan: To use a name specified in planning metadata (if no  
name is specified in planning metadata, the name specified  
by “Title Prefix” is used.)  
Setting for clip  
name or deletion  
Title Prefix  
Call the Character Set screen to set the title part (4 to 46  
nnn_ (nnn=least three digits of characters) of the clip names.  
the serial number)  
Configuration of the Character Set screen  
(Max. 7 characters displayed)  
Character selection area (3 lines):  
To select a character to insert in the cursor position of the  
Title Prefix area.  
!#$%()+,-.=@[]^_~0123456789  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
Cursor operation area (1 line):  
Space: To change the character in the cursor position to a  
space  
INS: To insert a space in the cursor position  
DEL: To delete a character in the cursor position  
T: To move the cursor to the left  
t: To move the cursor to the right  
ESC: To cancel the change and exit the Character Set  
screen  
END: To validate the change and exit the Character Set  
screen  
Title Prefix area (1 line):  
For entering the title  
To set the title  
1 Turn the jog dial to select (highlight) a character in the  
character selection area to be entered in the cursor position  
of the Title Prefix area. Then press the jog dial. (The  
selected character is entered and the cursor moves to the  
right.)  
2 Repeat step 1 for setting the title. (Use Space, INS, and DEL  
as required.)  
3 When the title setting is completed, select END to exit the  
Character Set screen.  
Number Set  
000l to 9999  
Update  
Set the 4-numeric part of the clip name.  
To update the managerial file on the SxS memory card in the  
1)  
Media(A) / Media(B)  
selected slot.  
(Select “Execute” on the confirmation screen to begin.)  
Last Clip DEL  
Select “Execute” to delete the last recorded clip.  
Execute / Cancel  
All Clips DEL  
Execute / Cancel  
Select “Execute” to delete all clips on the active SxS memory  
card.  
Note  
Clips to which you applied OK mark cannot be deleted.  
Setup Menu List  
127  
   
OTHERS  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
2)  
Clips  
To copy all clips on an SxS memory card to the other.  
Copy All  
(Select “Execute” on the confirmation screen to begin.)  
Setting for  
collective copy of  
clips and/or  
General files  
General Files  
To copy all files in the General folder on an SxS memory card  
to the other.  
(Select “Execute” on the confirmation screen to begin.)  
Clips&General  
To copy all clips and files in the General folder on an SxS  
memory card to the other.  
(Select “Execute” on the confirmation screen to begin.)  
Load/Slot(A)  
Execute / Cancel  
To load planning metadata from the SxS memory card in slot  
A.  
Selecting “Execute” displays the list of the planning metadata  
files stored on the SxS memory card in slot A. Specify a file,  
select “Load” then “Execute” for loading.  
Plan.Metadata  
Setting planning  
metadata  
Load/Slot(B)  
Execute / Cancel  
To load planning metadata from the SxS memory card in slot  
B.  
Selecting “Execute” displays the list of the planning metadata  
files stored on the SxS memory card in slot B. Specify a file,  
select “Load” then “Execute” for loading.  
Properties  
Execute / Cancel  
Select “Execute” to display the detailed information of the  
planning metadata loaded in the camcorder.  
Clear  
Execute / Cancel  
Select “Execute” to clear the planning metadata loaded in the  
camcorder.  
Clip Name Disp  
Title1 / Title2  
Select the display mode of the clip name specified in planning  
metadata.  
Title1: Clip name in ASCII format  
Title2: Clip name in UTF-8 format  
DHCP  
Enable / Disable  
Select whether to acquire the IP address automatically from a  
DHCP server (Enable) or not (Disable).  
Network  
Setting for  
network  
IP Address  
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255  
(192.168.1.10)  
Set the IP address when “DHCP” is set to “Disable.”  
Set the subnet mask when “DHCP” is set to “Disable.”  
Set the default gateway when “DHCP” is set to “Disable.”  
connections  
Note  
Subnet Mask  
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255  
(255.255.255.0)  
The CBK-WA01  
Wi-Fi Adapter and  
installation of the  
CBK-RGB01  
RGB and S-LOG  
Output Option are  
required.  
Default Gateway  
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255  
(0.0.0.0)  
User Name  
(admin)  
Set a desired user name in 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters.  
Sets a password in 0 to 31 alphanumeric characters.  
Password  
(pmw-f3)  
Note  
The password is displayed as “ * ”.  
Set  
Confirms the “Network”settings.  
Select “Execute” to confirm.  
Execute / Cancel  
MAC Address  
Display the MAC address.  
Net Config Reset  
Execute / Cancel  
Reset the “Network” settings to the preset values.  
Select “Execute” to reset.  
Setup Menu List  
128  
   
OTHERS  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Scan Networks  
Execute / Cancel  
Scan the available network connections when “Wi-Fi” is set  
to “Enable.”  
Wi-Fi  
Setting for Wi-Fi  
connection  
SSID (Network connection name Reset the network connection name to the default settings.  
display)  
Reset  
Note  
The CBK-WA01  
Wi-Fi Adapter and  
installation of the  
CBK-RGB01  
RGB and S-LOG  
Output Option are  
required.  
Network Type  
Infra / Adhoc  
Select the connection mode.  
Infra: Infrastructure mode  
Adhoc: Ad hoc mode  
Ch  
Set the wireless channel when “Network Type” is “Adhoc.”  
1 to 11  
Authentication  
Select the network authentication.  
Open: Open system authentication  
When “Network Type” is “Infra” Shared: Shared key authentication  
Open / Shared / WPA / WPA2 WPA: WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) authentication  
When “Network Type” is “Adhoc” WPA2: WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) authentication  
Open / Shared  
Encryption  
Select the type of data encryption.  
Disable: Do not apply data encryption.  
When “Authentication” is “Open” WEP: Apply WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)  
or “Shared”  
Disable / WEP  
TKIP: Apply TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)  
AES: Apply AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)  
When “Authentication” is “WPA”  
or “WPA2”  
Disable / TKIP / AES  
WEP Key Index  
Select the key index when “Encryption” is “WEP.”  
1 / 2 / 3 / 4  
Input Select  
Select the input format depending on the network key (or  
security key).  
When “Encryption” is “WEP”  
ASCII5: Five characters ASCII format  
ASCII5 / ASCII13 / HEX10 / ASCII13: 13 characters ASCII format  
HEX26 HEX10: 10 hexadecimal digits  
When “Encryption” is “TKIP” or HEX26: 26 hexadecimal digits  
”AES” ASCII8-63: 8 to 63 characters ASCII 8-bit format  
ASCII8-63 / HEX64  
HEX64: 64 hexadecimal digits (characters)  
Set the network key (or security key).  
Key (network key)  
Set  
Confirm the “Wi-Fi” settings when “Wi-Fi” is set to “Enable.”  
Select “Execute” to confirm.  
Execute / Cancel  
Wi-Fi Status  
Display “Connect” while connection is being attempted.  
x x x Connect (display only) Display black squares to show the connection status by the  
number of squares during communication.  
Wireless Mode  
Display an IEEE802.11 standard.  
802.11b / 802.11g / 802.11n  
Wi-Fi  
Select whether to enable or disable Wi-Fi connection.  
Enable / Disable  
RGB  
Display the options available with this camcorder.  
RGB: CBK-RGB01 RGB and S-LOG Output Option  
Option  
Displaying options  
Setup Menu List  
129  
   
OTHERS  
Menu items  
Subitems and setting values Contents  
Execute / Cancel Install options.  
InstallOption  
If you select “InstallOption,” the password entry screen is  
displayed. Enter a 4-digit number and press the jog dial. A  
confirmation screen appears. Select “Execute” to begin  
installation.  
Installing options  
For details, refer to the Installation Manual supplied with the  
CBK-RGB01.  
RGB  
Move installed option keys to an SxS memory card.  
If you select “Remove Option” and specify the option name to  
be moved, the password entry screen is displayed. Enter the 4-  
digit number set for InstallOption and press the jog dial. A  
confirmation screen appears. Select “Execute” to begin  
moving of the option key.  
Remove  
Option  
Moving options  
For details, refer to the Installation Manual supplied with the  
CBK-RGB01.  
Media (A)  
Execute / Cancel  
Select “Execute” to format the SxS memory card in slot A.  
Select “Execute” to format the SxS memory card in slot B.  
The current software version of the camcorder is displayed.  
Format Media  
Formatting SxS  
memory cards  
Media (B)  
Execute / Cancel  
Vx.xx  
Version  
Showing the  
version of this unit  
Execute / Cancel  
Use when updating of the camcorder is required.  
Select “Execute” to begin.  
Version Up  
Updating this unit  
Note  
This item cannot be selected when no SxS memory card has  
been loaded.  
1)If recording/playback cannot be made with an SxS  
memory card because it has been operated with a  
device other than this camcorder, or for some other  
reason, updating the managerial file on the card may  
improve the situation.  
2)When you copy an SxS memory card including  
multiple clips and files to another card with the same  
capacity, all the clips and files may not be copied  
completely to the end, depending on the usage  
conditions or memory properties.  
Setup Menu List  
130  
         
Storing/Retrieving the Setting Data  
Setup File  
You can store all the menu settings (including  
picture profiles) as a setup file on an SxS memory  
card.  
By retrieving the stored setup file, the proper  
setup condition can be immediately obtained.  
For the setup file operations, use “Camera Data”  
of the OTHERS menu.  
Notes  
• If a setup file already exists on the memory card  
you specified in Step 1, a message to confirm  
whether to overwrite the file is displayed.  
• If there is not sufficient space on the memory  
card, an error message is displayed.  
Note  
Retrieving the Setup File  
The Clock Set, Time Zone, Hours Meter values  
are excluded.  
When you retrieve the stored setup file, the  
camcorder settings are changed according to the  
file.  
Storing the Setup File  
1
Insert the memory card on which you  
stored the setup file into a card slot.  
Only one setup file can be stored on one SxS  
memory card.  
Check that the corresponding memory card  
icon is displayed on the screen. If a memory  
card in the other slot is selected, press the  
SLOT SELECT button to switch.  
1
Insert a memory card on which you  
wish to store the setup file to a card slot.  
Check that the corresponding memory card  
icon is displayed on the screen. If a memory  
card in the other slot is selected, press the  
SLOT SELECT button to switch.  
2
3
4
Select “Camera Data” from the  
OTHERS menu.  
Select “Recall.”  
2
Select “Camera Data” from the  
OTHERS menu.  
“Cancel” and “Execute” appear to the right.  
Select “Execute.”  
O
THERS  
B
B
Al l Reset  
Ca era Data  
LUT Memory  
3D-Link Mode  
ND Adjustment  
Time Zone  
Reading of data from the memory card begins.  
An in-progress message is displayed during data  
reading. When the read-out is completed, a  
completion message is displayed, indicating that  
the camcorder settings have been changed  
according to the setup file.  
m
Store  
Recall  
B
00:00  
:
B
Off  
:
UTC +09:00  
3
4
Select “Store.”  
“Cancel” and “Execute” appear to the right.  
Resetting to the Standard Values  
Select “Execute.”  
The current camcorder settings you made through  
various menu and button operations can be  
collectively returned to the standard statuses  
(factory settings) by executing “All Reset” of the  
OTHERS menu.  
Writing of data to the memory card begins.  
An in-progress message is displayed during  
writing. When writing is completed, a completion  
message is displayed.  
Setup File  
131  
                     
viewfinder screen. If the icon of the other slot is  
displayed, press the SLOT SELECT button to  
switch.  
Lens Files  
4
5
Adjust the white balance.  
Press the MENU button to set the  
camcorder to Menu mode and select the  
LENS FILE menu with  
This camcorder can save the setting data used to  
compensate for lens characteristics, such as flare,  
white shading, and white balance, as lens files.  
The optimum compensation can be easily made  
merely by retrieving the appropriate file upon  
lens replacement.  
.
6
Select “Setting” and set the  
compensation values.  
You can save up to 32 lens files in the  
camcorder’s built-in memory and up to 64 lens  
files on an SxS memory card.  
LENS FILE  
B
I nf ormat i on  
Rese t Set t i ng  
B
B
O
pera t ion  
F
F
F
W
W
l are  
l are  
l are  
hite  
hite  
R
G
B
O
O
:
0
Data stored as lens files  
Set t i ng  
: +99  
00:00  
:
:
:
-
99  
0
0
Item  
Contents  
f fset  
f fset  
R
B
Flare R  
Flare levels  
Flare G  
Flare B  
The compensation data you set can be  
cleared to the factory-set values by selecting  
“Reset Setting.”  
White Offset R  
White Offset B  
Shading R H SAW  
Shading R H PARA  
Shading R V SAW  
Shading R V PARA  
Shading G H SAW  
Shading G H PARA  
Shading G V SAW  
Shading G V PARA  
Shading B H SAW  
Shading B H PARA  
Shading B V SAW  
Shading B V PARA  
White balance compensation  
values  
White shading compensation  
values  
7
When the adjustments are finished,  
select “Operation.”  
LENS FILE  
B
I nf ormat i on Display  
M
ode  
:
D
ate&T  
i
me  
B
O
pera t ion  
R
S
R
S
F
eca l l  
tore  
eca l l  
t ore  
M
e
m
ory  
ory  
B
Set t i ng  
Mem  
00:00  
Sx  
S
S
e
Sx  
i l e  
N
am  
:
N
o
Offset  
8
9
To assign a specific name (max. 16  
characters) for the data, select “File  
Name” and specify the name.  
Saving a Lens File  
Turn the jog dial to select a character then press  
the dial to move the cursor to the next column.  
Pressing the dial at “SET” registers the name  
you set.  
You can set the compensation data in a lens file  
using the LENS FILE menu.  
1
2
3
Mount a lens for which you wish to store  
the compensation data in a file.  
Select “Store Memory” or “Store SxS.”  
Turn on the camcorder by setting the  
power switch to ON.  
Select “Store Memory” to store the data in the  
built-in memory or “Store SxS” to store them in  
an SxS memory card.  
To save the lens file to an SxS memory  
card, first insert the card into a memory  
card slot.  
10 Select “Execute.”  
A list of lens files appears. File numbers where  
“No File” is displayed are empty file numbers.  
Check that the memory card icon corresponding  
to the slot is displayed on the LCD monitor/  
Lens Files  
132  
     
To use the Lens Auto Recall function, set “Auto  
Recall” under “Operation” of the LENS FILE  
menu to one of the following:  
On (Lens Name): Load the lens file that  
corresponds to the model name.  
11 Select the file number under which you  
wish to save the data then press the jog  
dial.  
A confirmation message appears.  
On (Serial Number): Load the lens file that  
corresponds to the model name and serial  
number if the lens supports communication  
of the serial number. (If the lens does not  
support communication of the serial number,  
the lens file that corresponds to the model  
name will be loaded with either setting.)  
12 Select “Execute.”  
If you have selected “Store SxS” in step 9,  
the access lamp lights when you execute the  
save. When the data has been saved to the  
SxS memory card, a completion message  
appears and the access lamp goes dark.  
Retrieving Lens Files  
To load a lens file from an SxS memory card,  
insert the SxS memory card into a memory card  
slot then proceed as follows:  
1
2
Select “Operation” from the LENS  
FILE menu.  
Select “Recall Memory” or “Recall  
SxS.”  
Select “Recall Memory” to load the data from  
the built-in memory or “Recall SxS” to load  
them from an SxS memory card.  
3
Select “Execute.”  
A list of lens files appears.  
The display mode of the list can be changed with  
“Display Mode.”  
4
5
Select the desired file number then  
press the jog dial.  
A confirmation message appears.  
Select “Execute.”  
If you have selected “Recall SxS” in step 2, the  
access lamp lights. When the specified lens file  
has been loaded from the SxS memory card, a  
completion message appears and the access  
lamp goes dark.  
Automatic Retrieval of a Lens File  
When you are using a lens that supports serial  
communication, you can set up the camcorder by  
automatically loading the lens file that  
corresponds to the lens settings (Lens Auto Recall  
function).  
Lens Files  
133  
   
Connecting External Devices  
Connecting External Monitors and Recording Device  
To display recording/playback pictures on an  
external monitor, select the output signal and use  
an appropriate cable for the monitor to be  
connected.  
To display the menus and status information on  
the connected monitor  
Set “SDI/HDMI Out Display” (page 116) of the  
VIDEO SET menu to “On.”Note  
Output signal from the camcorder can be  
recorded when a recording device is connected.  
Regardless of whether the signal is HD or SD, the  
same status information and menus can be  
displayed on the external monitor as those on the  
LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.  
According to the signal fed to the monitor, set  
“SDI/HDMI Out Display” or “Video Out  
Display” of the VIDEO SET menu (page 115) to  
“On.”  
Note  
No signal is fed out from the SDI OUT connector  
when “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the  
VIDEO SET menu is at any setting other than  
“HD SDI” or “SD SDI,” enabling the HDMI  
OUT connector and the i.LINK (HDV/DV)  
connector.  
HDMI OUT connector (Type A connector)  
When outputting SD signals in HD mode, select  
in advance the output mode (Squeeze, Letterbox,  
or Edge Crop) with “Down Converter” (page  
116) of the VIDEO SET menu.  
Signal output from this connector is enabled by  
setting “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” (page  
115) of the VIDEO SET menu.  
In HD mode, you can select HD HDMI, SD  
HDMI interlace, or SD HDMI Progressive  
output.  
In SD mode, only an SD HDMI interlace signal  
can be output.  
Use a commercially available HDMI cable for  
connection.  
Note  
SD signals down-converted for output have the  
following restrictions:  
Images of 50P/50i/25P are output as PAL signals,  
those of 59.94P/59.94i/29.97P are output as  
NTSC signals, and those of 23.98P are output as  
2-3 pulled-down NTSC signals.  
To display the menus and status information on  
the connected monitor  
Set “SDI/HDMI Out Display” (page 116) of the  
VIDEO SET menu to “On.”  
SDI OUT connector (BNC type)  
The connector is set at the factory to output an HD  
SDI signal.  
VIDEO OUT connector (BNC type) and  
AUDIO OUT CH-1/CH-2 connectors (RCA  
phono jacks)  
When you set the camcorder to SD mode, the  
connector outputs an SD SDI signal.  
Using “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” (page  
115) of the VIDEO SET menu, you can change  
the setting so that it outputs down-converted SD  
SDI signal for monitoring even in HD mode.  
Use a commercially available 75-ohm coaxial  
cable for connection.  
The VIDEO OUT connector outputs HD-Y  
signals in HD mode or down-converted SD  
analog composite signals for monitoring in SD  
mode.  
Use a commercially available BNC cable for  
connection.  
Audio signals are connected via the AUDIO OUT  
connectors with a commercially available audio  
cables.  
To start recording on an external device in  
synchronization  
With HD SDI signal output selected,  
synchronized recording is possible by feeding a  
REC trigger signal to an external recording  
device connected via the SDI OUT connector. To  
enable synchronized recording, set “SDI Rec  
Control” (page 117) of the VIDEO SET menu to  
“HD SDI Remote I/F.”  
To display the menus and status information on  
the connected monitor  
Set “Video Out Display” (page 116) of the  
VIDEO SET menu to “On.”  
Connecting External Monitors and Recording Device  
134  
                       
HD SDI A/B (Dual-Link) connectors (BNC  
type)  
Operating Clips With a  
Computer  
Dual-link output from the HD SDI A/B  
connectors can be enabled by setting “Dual-Link  
& Gamma Select” (page 116) of the VIDEO SET  
menu to “1.5G YPbPr422 & Video.” Camera  
images can be displayed on a video monitor that  
supports Dual-Link connection.  
When the CBK-RGB01 RGB and S-LOG Output  
Option is installed, 1.5G RGB444, 3G YPbPr422  
and 3G RGB444 signals can also be output.  
Use commercially available BNC cables for  
connection.  
The clips recorded on SxS memory cards with  
this camcorder can be controlled on a computer or  
edited using the optional nonlinear editing  
software.  
For these purposes, the clips on an SxS memory  
card can be operated by directly loading the card  
in a computer or by connecting the camcorder or  
the optional SBAC-US10 SxS Memory Card  
USB Reader/Writer to the computer, using an  
USB cable as shown below.  
For details on the output formats, refer to the  
Supplement in the supplied CD-ROM labeled  
“Manuals for Solid-State Memory Camcorder.”  
Using the ExpressCard slot of a computer  
Notes  
If the computer is equipped with an ExpressCard/  
34 or ExpressCard/54 slot, you can directly insert  
the SxS memory card containing clips recorded  
with this camcorder and access to the files.  
• When the SDI output setting is changed, the  
sync signal for Dual-Link outputs may become  
discontinuous.  
• When outputting signals from the HD SDI A/B  
connectors, use the BP-U60 battery pack or  
supply power via the DC IN connector.  
For the operating requirements for the computer, see  
Note  
i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector (IEEE1394,  
4-pin)  
The SxS Device Driver Software on the CD-  
ROM supplied with the camcorder must be  
installed on your computer.  
Input/output of an HDV or DVCAM stream can  
be enabled by changing the “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK  
I/O Select” (page 115) setting of the VIDEO SET  
menu.  
A monitor or VTR that supports i.LINK can be  
connected.  
For information on installation of the driver, refer to  
the ReadMe on the supplied CD-ROM.  
For support information for the driver, visit the  
following URL:  
http://www.sony.net/SxS-Support/  
For details on i.LINK connection, see “Connecting  
to the  
ExpressCard  
slot  
SxS memory card  
Computer with SxS  
Device Driver Software  
installed  
With a Windows computer, check that a  
Removable Disk appears in My Computer. This  
indicates normal status.  
With a Macintosh computer, an icon is displayed  
on the menu bar.  
Operating Clips With a Computer  
135  
         
Connecting with a USB cable  
Connect USB Now?  
Execute  
When you connect the camcorder or the SBAC-  
US10 SxS Memory Card USB Reader/Writer  
(optional) using the USB cable, the memory card  
in the slot is acknowledged as an extended drive  
by the computer.  
When two memory cards are mounted in this  
camcorder, they are acknowledged as two  
independent extended drives by the computer.  
C
ancel  
Note  
This message will not be displayed while  
another confirmation message or in-progress  
message (e.g., for formatting or restoration of  
an SxS memory card) is shown on the screen.  
It appears when formatting or restoration is  
completed.  
The message is also not displayed while the  
CLIP INFO screen is shown on the screen. It  
appears when an operation on the CLIP  
INFO screen is completed or you return to  
the thumbnail screen.  
SxS memory card  
2
3
Select “Execute” by operating the jog  
dial.  
The screen displays the following:  
(mini-B)  
USB cable  
USB cable  
(supplied with  
(supplied with  
SBAC-US10)  
SBAC-US10  
(optional)  
the camcorder)  
USB Connecting  
With Windows, check that the memory  
card is displayed as a removable disk in  
My Computer.  
With Macintosh, check that a “NO  
NAME” or “Untitled” folder was  
created on the desktop.  
This indicates that the connection is active.  
(The folder name on the desktop of the  
Macintosh computer can be changed as  
needed.)  
Notes  
• When connecting the USB cable to the  
computer, be careful to check the form and  
direction of the USB connector.  
• The camcorder and the SBAC-US10 do not  
work on the bus power from the computer.  
Supply the operating power independently.  
Note  
The following operations must be eliminated  
when the access lamp is lit in red.  
• Turning the power off or disconnecting the  
power cord  
• Removing the SxS memory card  
• Disconnecting the USB cable  
Checking the connection to the  
camcorder  
1
Turn the camcorder on.  
When using the SBAC-US10, refer to the operating  
instructions of the SBAC-US10.  
A message prompting you to confirm that  
you wish to enable the USB connection is  
displayed on the LCD monitor/viewfinder  
screen.  
Operating Clips With a Computer  
136  
   
Store the clips to be edited on the HDD of your  
computer in advance, using the dedicated  
application software (supplied).  
Some editing software may not operate properly.  
Be sure to confirm before use that it conforms to  
the recording formats used with this camcorder.  
Removing an SxS memory card  
Windows  
1. Click on the icon of “Safely Remove  
Hardware” on the task bar of the computer.  
2. Select “Safely remove SxS Memory Card -  
To use Final Cut Pro of Apple Inc.  
It is necessary to convert the clips to files that can  
Drive(X:)” from the displayed menu.  
be edited with the Final Cut Pro.  
3. Check that the Safe To Remove Hardware  
message appears then remove the card.  
For information on the application software to be  
used to transfer, visit the web sites shown in  
page of the supplied CD-ROM.  
Macintosh  
Drag the SxS memory card icon on the desktop to  
Trash.  
If the SxS memory card icon is located on Finder,  
click on the eject icon on its side.  
Note  
Do not select “Card Power Off” from the SxS  
memory card icon displayed on the menu bar.  
Using the supplied application software  
To copy clips to the local disk of a computer, the  
dedicated application software in the supplied  
CD-ROM must be used. Install the software to  
your computer.  
Although the data regarding recorded materials  
are stored over multiple files and folders, you can  
easily handle the clips without considering such  
data and directory structure by using the  
dedicated application software.  
Note  
If you operate, e.g. copy the clips on the SxS  
memory card by using the Explorer (Windows) or  
Finder (Macintosh), the subsidiary data contained  
by the clips may not be maintained. To avoid such  
a problem, use the dedicated application software.  
For the operating requirements, installation and  
operations, visit the web sites shown in “XDCAM EX  
web sites” on page 12 or refer to the User’s Guide  
contained in the CD-ROM.  
For support information on the dedicated  
application software, visit the web sites shown in  
page of the supplied CD-ROM.  
Using a nonlinear editing system  
For a nonlinear editing system, optional editing  
software that corresponds to the recording  
formats used with this camcorder is required.  
Operating Clips With a Computer  
137  
 
camcorder is output as an HDV or DVCAM  
stream via the i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector. It  
can be recorded on a connected HDV or DVCAM  
recorder in synchronization with your recording  
start/stop operation on this camcorder.  
Connecting an External  
Device (i.LINK  
Connection)  
1
Perform the preparatory settings of the  
camcorder.  
When an HDV-compatible video format (SP  
1440/59.94i, SP 1440/50i, or SP 1440/23.98P) or  
a DVCAM-compatible video format (format of  
SD mode) is selected, setting “SDI/HDMI/  
i.LINK I/O Select” (page 115) of the VIDEO  
SET menu to a setting that includes “HDV” or  
“DVCAM” enables signal inputs/outputs via the  
i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector.  
You can record the same images as those  
recorded on an SxS memory card in this  
camcorder on an external device connected to the  
i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector, or record playback  
pictures (HDV streams) of the external device on  
the memory card in the camcorder.  
• Set “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” (page  
115) of the VIDEO SET menu to a setting  
that includes “HDV” or “DVCAM.”  
HDV: To output an HDV stream when you  
set the video format to SP 1440/59.94i,  
SP 1440/50i, or SP 1440/23.98P in HD  
mode  
DVCAM: To output a DVCAM stream in  
SD mode  
• Set “Trigger Mode” (page 125) of the  
OTHERS menu to “Both” or “External.”  
Both: To record both on the memory card  
in the camcorder and on the external  
device  
For playback, DVCAM streams of 16-bit 2-  
channel lock audio are acceptable.  
Nonlinear editing conforming to the HDV format  
is also enabled.  
External: To record only on the external  
device  
2
3
Set the external device to recording  
standby status.  
Notes  
For operations of the external device, refer to  
the operation manual of that device.  
• DVCAM streams cannot be recorded with the  
camcorder.  
• When “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the  
VIDEO SET menu is set to a setting that  
includes “HDV” or “DVCAM,” no signal is  
output from the SDI OUT connector and  
Slow&Quick Motion mode cannot be used.  
• Use the i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector only for  
one-to-one i.LINK connection.  
• When you change a setting which affects output  
signals from the i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector,  
such as “System” of the OTHERS menu, “SDI/  
HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select,” or “Down  
Converter” of the VIDEO SET menu,  
disconnect the i.LINK cable then change the  
setting. Changing such a setting with the  
i.LINK cable connected may cause improper  
operation of the connected i.LINK device.  
Start recording on the camcorder.  
The external device starts recording in  
synchronization.  
The status of the external device is displayed in  
the i.LINK status indication area (page 20) on the  
LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.  
Indication  
Status of the external device  
In HDV recording standby  
In HDV recording  
STBY  
HDV  
REC HDV  
STBY  
REC  
z
In DV recording standby  
In DV recording  
DV  
DV  
z
Notes  
• Operation may be different depending on the  
type of external device.  
• There is some time lag from when you start  
recording on this camcorder until the i.LINK  
status indication changes. Video and audio  
recordings do not start on the connected i.LINK  
Recording the Camcorder Picture  
on an External Device  
When you set the camcorder to E-E Display/  
Recording mode, the picture being shot with this  
Connecting an External Device (i.LINK Connection)  
138  
       
device before it enters synchronization even if  
“Trigger Mode” is set to “Both.”  
• While you can record shot marks on the  
memory card during recording, they are not  
added to the pictures recorded on the external  
device.  
Note  
DVCAM streams cannot be recorded.  
1
Set the external signal to a format that  
can be recorded on the camcorder.  
Signals of 1440 × 1080/59.94i can be  
recorded when the video format (page 40) is  
set to SP 1440/59.94i or SP 1440/23.98P.  
Signals of 1440 × 1080/50i can be recorded  
when set to SP 1440/50i.  
Recording is not allowed with other  
combinations of the video format and input  
signals.  
Nonlinear Editing  
You can transfer an HDV stream to a nonlinear  
editing system connected via the i.LINK(HDV/  
DV) connector.  
Notes  
• The i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector of this  
camcorder is a 4-pin connector. Check the  
number of pins of the i.LINK connector on your  
computer and use an appropriate i.LINK cable.  
• In searching pictures of this camcorder on the  
computer, it may take some time until the  
display is reflected on the computer.  
• If the playback clip is short or the playback  
starting point is near the end of the clip, the  
i.LINK signal may be interrupted between the  
clip and the next clip. When you try to capture  
such a signal using the nonlinear editing system,  
a malfunction may occur, depending on the  
nonlinear editing software in use.  
2
3
Select a setting that enables HDV  
stream input/output for “SDI/HDMI/  
i.LINK I/O Select” (page 115) of the  
VIDEO SET menu.  
Set “Input Source Select” (page 115) of  
the VIDEO SET menu to “i.LINK.”  
The input image is displayed on the LCD  
monitor/viewfinder screen and the monitor  
connected via the VIDEO OUT connector.  
The audio signal is output from the built-in  
speaker (or headphones connected to the  
headphone jack) and the speaker of the  
device connected to the AUDIO OUT  
connector.  
• If you specify a search speed other than 4, 15, or  
24 times normal with the nonlinear editing  
system, no i.LINK signal is fed out. In such a  
case, the picture on the LCD monitor may stay  
frozen.  
4
Press the REC START/STOP button on  
the handle.  
Recording begins.  
• High-speed playback picture may not be  
displayed on the computer screen, depending on  
the nonlinear editing software in use.  
Notes  
• The REC START/STOP button on the grip does  
not function.  
Setting on this camcorder  
Set “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” (page 115)  
of the VIDEO SET menu to a setting that includes  
“HDV” or “DVCAM.”  
• An error is generated in the following cases. In  
such a case, cancel Recording mode by pressing  
the REC START/STOP button on the handle.  
—The video format of input signal does not  
match that specified on the camcorder.  
—A copy-protected stream is being fed in.  
• If the input to the camcorder becomes no signal  
during recording, the tally lamps and the  
i.LINK zREC status indication on the LCD  
monitor/viewfinder screen flash, indicating that  
no signal is being recorded on the SxS memory  
card.  
For operations of the nonlinear editing software,  
refer to the operation manual of the software.  
Recording External Input Signals  
The HDV stream input from a device connected  
via the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector can be  
recorded on an SxS memory card in this  
camcorder.  
The timecodes superimposed on the i.LINK input  
are recorded regardless of the settings of the  
camcorder.  
When an input signal is resumed, recording is  
restarted, incrementing the clip number on the  
memory card.  
Connecting an External Device (i.LINK Connection)  
139  
     
About data transfer speed of i.LINK  
About i.LINK  
i.LINK defines a maximum data transfer speed of  
1)  
approximately 100, 200 and 400 Mbps that are  
described as S100, S200 and S400 respectively.  
For i.LINK devices, a maximum data transfer  
speed that the device supports is identified on  
“Specifications” page of the operating  
instructions supplied with the device or near its  
i.LINK connector.  
This section explains the specifications and  
features of i.LINK.  
What is i.LINK?  
1)When connecting with the device that support  
different data transfer speed, the actual data transfer  
speed may be different from those described on the  
i.LINK connectors.  
i.LINK is a digital serial interface designed to  
integrate devices equipped with i.LINK  
connectors. i.LINK allows your device to:  
• Perform two-way transmission and reception of  
data such as digital audio and digital video  
signals.  
• Control other i.LINK devices.  
• Easily connect multiple devices with a single  
i.LINK cable.  
What is Mbps?  
Mega bits per second. A measure of the rate at  
which data is transmitted per second. In case of  
100 Mbps, 100 Mega bits of data can be  
transmitted per second.  
Your i.LINK device is capable of connecting to a  
wide range of digital AV devices for data transfer  
and other operations.  
i.LINK operation with your camcorder  
For details on operation when other equipment  
with i.LINK (HDV) connector is connected, see  
For details on connection with i.LINK cable and  
necessary software, refer to the operating  
instructions supplied with the connected device.  
Other advantages include the following feature.  
When connected to multiple i.LINK devices,  
your i.LINK device can perform data transfer and  
other operations not only with the directly  
connected devices but also with any of the  
devices that are connected to those devices.  
Therefore, you do not need to be concerned with  
device connection order.  
About the required i.LINK cable  
However, depending on the features and  
specifications of the connected devices, you may  
need to use certain functions differently, and you  
may not be able to transfer data or perform certain  
operations.  
Use the Sony 6-pin-to-4-pin or 4-pin-to-4-pin  
i.LINK cable (for HDV dubbing) to connect the  
i.LINK devices.  
i.LINK and  
are trademarks.  
i.LINK, a nickname for IEEE 1394 proposed by  
Sony, is a trademark supported by many  
companies worldwide.  
IEEE 1394 is an international standard defined by  
IEEE, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics  
Engineers, Inc.  
Note  
The camcorder can be connected to one device  
with the i.LINK cable (DV cable). When you  
connect with a device that has two or more  
i.LINK connectors, refer to the operating  
instructions supplied with the connected device.  
About i.LINK  
140  
     
PAL Area  
Video format  
HQ 1920/50i  
HQ 1920/25P  
HQ 1440/50i  
HQ 1440/25P  
SP 1440/50i  
Valid reference signal  
1080/50i  
576/50i  
External Synchronization  
When multiple units of the PMW-F3K/F3L are  
used in the same shooting location, recording can  
be made in synchronization with a specific  
reference signal, and the timecode can be  
matched among all the units.  
HQ 1280/50P  
HQ 1280/25P  
1080/50i  
720/50P  
576/50i  
DVCAM50i SQ/EC  
DVCAM25P SQ/EC  
1080/50i  
576/50i  
Aligning the phase of the video signal  
(Genlock)  
The phase adjustment for the reference signal can  
also be made with “Genlock” (page 125) of the  
OTHERS menu.  
Genlock operation is enabled by supplying an SD  
or HD reference signal to the GENLOCK IN  
connector of the camcorder.  
Notes  
• If the reference signal is unstable, genlock is not  
possible.  
Valid reference signals depend on the video  
format selected.  
• The subcarrier is not synchronized.  
When the video format is HQ 1920/23.98P or  
HQ 1440/23.98P, select either “59.94i (2-3  
PullDown)” or “23.98P” with “23.98P Output”  
(page 116) of the VIDEO SET menu.  
Synchronizing the timecode of your  
camcorder with that of another unit  
NTSC Area/NTSC(J) Area  
The timecode of your camcorder can be locked to  
that of another unit.  
Video format  
Valid reference signal  
Set the unit that supplies the timecode to a mode  
in which the timecode output keeps advancing  
(Free Run or Clock mode).  
HQ 1920/59.94i  
1080/59.94i  
480/59.94i  
HQ 1920/29.97P  
HQ 1920/23.98P  
(23.98P Output:  
59.94i(2-3PullDown))  
HQ 1920/23.98P  
(23.98P Output:  
23.98PsF)  
1
Set “Timecode” of the TC/UB SET  
menu as follows:  
1080/23.98PsF  
480/59.94i  
Mode: Preset  
Run: Free Run  
HQ 1440/59.94i  
HQ 1440/29.97P  
HQ 1440/23.98P  
(23.98P Output:  
59.94i(2-3PullDown))  
1080/59.94i  
480/59.94i  
2
3
Press the TC/U-BIT/DURATION  
button so that the timecode is displayed  
on the screen.  
HQ 1440/23.98P  
(23.98P Output:  
23.98PsF)  
1080/23.98PsF  
480/59.94i  
Supply an HD or SD reference video  
signal to the GENLOCK IN connector  
and the reference timecode to the TC IN  
connector.  
SP 1440/59.94i  
SP 1440/23.98P  
1080/59.94i  
480/59.94i  
HQ 1280/59.94P  
HQ 1280/29.97P  
HQ 1280/23.98P  
1080/59.94i  
720/59.94P  
480/59.94i  
DVCAM59.94i SQ/EC 1080/59.94i  
480/59.94i  
DVCAM29.97P SQ/EC  
External Synchronization  
141  
         
To release the external timecode  
synchronization  
Change the “Timecode” setting of the TC/UB  
SET menu or turn off the camcorder.  
External synchronization is also released when  
you start recording in a special recording mode  
(Slow & Quick Motion, Frame Rec, or Interval  
Rec).  
TC IN  
Synchronizing the timecode of another  
unit with that of your camcorder  
GENLOCK IN  
The timecode of another unit can be locked to that  
of your camcorder.  
75-ohm  
coaxialcables  
(optional)  
1
Specify the timecode of your camcorder  
with “Timecode” and “TC Format” (see  
Reference  
video signal  
Reference  
timecode  
Thus the built-in timecode generator of your  
camcorder locks to the reference timecode.  
The message “EXT-LK” is displayed on the  
screen.  
2
Connect the TC OUT connector and  
VIDEO OUT connector with the  
timecode input and reference signal  
input of the other unit, respectively.  
T
STBY  
TCG 00:00:00:00  
HQ  
1080/23.98P  
EXT-LK  
VIDEO  
OUT  
After about 10 seconds, you can disconnect the  
external timecode without losing the  
synchronization.  
Notes  
• Check that the reference timecode and the  
reference video signal are in a phase relation  
that complies the SMPTE timecode standards.  
• When you finish the above procedure, the  
timecode is immediately synchronized with the  
external timecode, and the time data indication  
will show the value of the external timecode.  
However, wait for a few seconds until the  
timecode generator stabilizes before recording.  
• If the frequency of the reference video signal is  
not the same as the frame frequency of the  
camcorder, the camcorder cannot be correctly  
genlocked. In such a case, the timecode is not  
correctly synchronized with the external  
timecode.  
TC OUT  
75-ohm coaxial  
cables (optional)  
To the reference  
video input of the  
other unit  
To the timecode  
input of the other  
unit  
The timecode to be output from the TC OUT  
connector depends on the setting of “TC Out” on  
the TC/UB SET menu. If “TC Out” is set to  
“Generator,” the timecode generated by the  
timecode generator of the camcorder is output  
during recording and playback. If “TC Out” is set  
to “Auto,” the timecode generated by the  
timecode generator is output during recording,  
and that superimposed with the video signal is  
output during playback.  
• When the connection is removed, the timecode  
advance may shift one frame per hour with  
respect to the reference timecode.  
External Synchronization  
142  
     
Appendixes  
Important Notes on Operation  
To remove dust from inside the viewfinder  
remove the viewfinder by sliding it while holding  
the viewfinder release lever downward.  
Use and Storage  
Do not subject the unit to severe shock  
• The internal mechanism may be damaged or the  
body warped.  
• If an accessory mounted on the accessory shoe  
is subjected to severe shock, the accessory shoe  
may be damaged. In such a case, stop using it  
and contact your dealer or a Sony service  
representative.  
Viewfinder  
release lever  
7
N
IG  
S
S
A
6
N
P
O
T
/S  
C
E
R
Do not cover the unit while operating  
Putting a cloth, for example, over the unit can  
cause excessive internal heat build-up.  
B
A
R
S
/C  
A
M
T
H
U
M
F
B
R
N
E
P
A
V
IL  
P
/
L
A
P
Y/  
P
AU  
R
E
V
S
E
F
S
F
W
D
T
O
N
E
X
T
F
O
B
R
T
D
IS  
P
H
IS  
T
O
G
R
A
M
2
B
A
I
D
S
S
S
IG  
D
H
3
N
After use  
In the event of operating problems  
If you should experience problems with the unit,  
contact your Sony dealer.  
Always set the power switch to OFF.  
Before storing the unit for a long period  
Remove the battery pack.  
Note about the battery terminal  
Grip the handle when carrying  
Grip the handle to carry. If you carry it by other  
parts, such as the viewfinder block or the LCD  
monitor block, the camcorder may drop, causing  
injury.  
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for  
battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable  
part.  
Power may not be supplied to the unit properly if  
the pins of the battery terminal are bent or  
deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they  
become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use.  
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep  
the unit working properly and to prolong its  
usable lifetime.  
Do not leave the camcorder with the lenses  
facing the sun  
Direct sunlight can enter through the lenses, be  
focused in the camcorder, and cause fire.  
Shipping  
Contact a Sony service or sales representative for  
more information about inspections.  
• Remove the memory cards before transporting  
the unit.  
• If sending the unit by truck, ship, air or other  
transportation service, pack it in the shipping  
carton of the unit.  
Use and storage locations  
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or  
storing the unit in the following places:  
• In excessive heat or cold (operating temperature  
range: 0ºC to 40ºC or 32ºF to 104ºF)  
Remember that in summer in warm climates the  
temperature inside a car with the windows  
closed can easily exceed 50ºC (122ºF).  
• In damp or dusty locations  
• Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain  
• Locations subject to violent vibration  
• Near strong magnetic fields  
• Close to radio or TV transmitters producing  
strong electromagnetic fields.  
Care of the unit  
Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the lens  
using a blower.  
If the body of the unit is dirty, clean it with a soft,  
dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth steeped in  
a little neutral detergent, then wipe dry. Do not  
use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinner, as  
these may cause discoloration or other damage to  
the finish of the unit.  
Important Notes on Operation  
143  
     
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for  
extended periods  
Aliasing  
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they  
may appear jagged or flicker.  
To prevent electromagnetic interference from  
portable communications devices  
The use of portable telephones and other  
communications devices near this unit can result  
in malfunctions and interference with audio and  
video signals.  
It is recommended that the portable  
communications devices near this unit be  
powered off.  
Flicker  
If recording is made under lighting produced by  
discharge tubes, such as fluorescent, sodium, or  
mercury-vapor lamps, the screen may flicker,  
colors may vary, or horizontal stripes may appear  
distorted.  
Note on laser beams  
Laser beams may damage the CMOS image  
sensors. If you shoot a scene that includes a laser  
beam, be careful not to let the laser beam be  
directed into the lens of the camcorder.  
In such cases, set the Flicker-Reduction function  
to Auto mode (see page 52).  
About the LCD panels  
The LCD panels are manufactured with  
extremely high-precision technology that yields  
effective pixel rates of 99.99% or higher.  
However, very rarely, one or more  
pixels may be permanently dark or permanently  
lit in white, red, blue, or green.  
This phenomenon is not a malfunction. Such  
pixels have no effect on the recorded data, and the  
unit may be used with confidence even if they are  
present.  
In some cases, such phenomena may not be  
improved with the Flicker-Reduction function.  
It is recommend to set the electronic shutter speed  
1
1
to /  
sec. in 50-Hz areas and to / in 60-Hz  
60  
100  
areas.  
Focal plane  
Owing to the characteristics of the pickup  
elements (CMOS sensors) for reading video  
signals, subjects that quickly move across the  
screen may appear slightly skewed.  
Flash band  
Phenomena specific to CMOS image  
sensors  
The luminance at the top and bottom of the screen  
may change when shooting a flashlight beam or a  
light source that quickly flashes.  
The following phenomena that may appear in  
images are specific to CMOS (Complementary  
Metal Oxide Semiconductor) image sensors.  
They do not indicate malfunctions.  
Note on the viewfinder display  
• Pictures on the LCD monitor and viewfinder  
screen may be distorted by the following  
operations:  
—Changing the video format  
—Rec Review  
—Starting playback from the Thumbnail  
screen  
—Reversing the LCD panel  
White flecks  
Although the CMOS image sensors are produced  
with high-precision technologies, fine white  
flecks may be generated on the screen in rare  
cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc.  
This is related to the principle of CMOS image  
sensors and is not a malfunction.  
—Switching the Expanded Focus display  
• When you change the eye direction in the  
viewfinder, you may see primary colors red,  
green, and blue, but this is not a defect of the  
camcorder. These primary colors are not  
recorded on any recording media.  
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the  
following cases:  
• when operating at a high environmental  
temperature  
• when you have raised the master gain  
(sensitivity)  
• when operating in Slow-Shutter mode  
Important Notes on Operation  
144  
 
Notes on data compatibility with other  
XDCAM EX-series products  
Backup Battery  
• When you use other PMW-series products to  
play materials recorded on the PMW-F3K/F3L,  
any media in which clips of formats not  
supported by those products have been recorded  
cannot be used.  
This camcorder uses a backup battery to retain  
various setting data.  
A lithium battery (CR2032) for backup is  
mounted in the camcorder at the factory.  
The backup battery retains the date, time, and  
timecode in Free Run mode even when no  
operating power is being supplied.  
• The setting data (page 131) including picture  
profiles of the PMW-F3K/F3L cannot be used  
on other products.  
• The setting data for other PMW-series products  
cannot be used on the PMW-F3K/F3L.  
Service life of the backup battery  
Fragmentation  
When the backup battery’s voltage falls, the  
backup battery low-voltage warning appears on  
the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.  
If this warning appears, replace the battery as  
soon as possible.  
If pictures cannot be recorded/reproduced  
properly, try formatting the recording medium.  
While repeating picture recording/playback with  
a certain recording medium for an extended  
period, files in the medium may be fragmented,  
disabling proper recording/storage. In such a  
case, make a backup of clips in the medium then  
perform formatting of the medium using “Format  
Media” (page 130) of the OTHERS menu.  
WARNING  
• Battery may explode if mistreated. Do not  
recharge, disassemble, or dispose of in fire.  
• Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat  
such as sunshine, fire or the like.  
CAUTION  
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly  
replaced. Replace only with the same or  
equivalent type recommended by the  
manufacturer.  
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey  
the law in the relative area or country.  
Replacing the backup battery  
Notes  
• Be sure to set the power switch to OFF when  
replacing the backup battery.  
• Be careful not to drop the removed screw into  
the camcorder.  
Backup Battery  
145  
     
1
Open the cover of the backup battery  
holder on the bottom by loosening the  
screw, and remove the battery.  
CR2025  
3V  
2
3
Insert a new backup battery (CR2032)  
with the + symbol on the battery facing  
outside.  
CR2025  
3V  
Attach the cover in the original position.  
CR2025  
3V  
Backup Battery  
146  
Troubleshooting  
Operating Power  
Symptoms  
Cause  
Remedy  
The camcorder does not No battery pack is mounted and no Mount a battery pack (page 22) or connect an AC  
power on when you set  
the power switch to ON. connector.  
The battery pack is completely  
exhausted.  
power is supplied to the DC IN  
power using the AC-DN10 (page 23) .  
Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one  
The power supply cuts  
while operating.  
The battery pack becomes exhausted. Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one  
The battery pack becomes The ambient temperature is very low. This owes to the battery characteristics and is not a  
exhausted very quickly.  
defect.  
The battery pack is inadequately  
charged.  
Recharge the battery pack (page 22).  
If the battery pack is soon exhausted even after you  
charged it fully, it may comes to the end of its life.  
Replace it with a new one.  
Recording/Playback  
Symptoms  
Cause  
Remedy  
Recording does not start The power switch is set to OFF.  
Set the power switch to ON.  
when you press any  
recording start/stop  
protected.  
button.  
The SxS memory card is write-  
Release the write protection (page 34), or replace the  
card with a non-protected SxS memory card.  
The SxS memory card is full.  
Replace the card with one having sufficient space.  
The SxS memory card needs  
restoration.  
Restore the memory card (page 37).  
Playback does not start  
when you press the PLAY  
button.  
The power switch is set to OFF.  
Set the power switch to ON.  
The supplied IR Remote Remote control operation is disabled. Enable remote control operation (page 32).  
Commander does not  
work.  
The battery of the IR Remote  
Commander is exhausted.  
Replace the battery with a new one.  
Audio recording is not  
possible.  
The AUDIO LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) Adjust the audio recording levels with the AUDIO  
controls are set to the minimum level. LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls (page 56).  
The recorded sound is  
distorted.  
The audio level is too high.  
Adjust the audio recording levels with the AUDIO  
LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls (page 56), and record  
again.  
The recorded sound has a The audio level is too low.  
high noise level.  
Adjust the audio recording levels with the AUDIO  
LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls (page 56), and record  
again.  
Troubleshooting  
147  
       
External Devices  
Symptoms  
Cause  
Remedy  
The equipment connected “Input Source Select” of the VIDEO Set it to “i.LINK.”  
to the camcorder via an  
i.LINK connection does  
not react as expected, for  
example, no picture  
SET menu is set to “Camera.”  
It sometimes takes time for the  
connected equipment to recognize  
the operation.  
Wait for about 15 seconds. If the connected  
equipment still does not react, do the following:  
Check the i.LINK cable, for example, by re-  
plugging it.  
appears on its screen.  
• Turn the power off, and connect the cable again.  
• Change the i.LINK cable.  
Troubleshooting  
148  
 
Error/Warning Indications  
The camcorder informs you of situations where  
warning, caution, or an operation check is  
required, through messages on the LCD monitor/  
viewfinder screen, the tally lamps, and a buzzer.  
The buzzer is output to the built-in speaker or to  
the headphones connected via the headphone  
connector. The buzzer volume can be adjusted  
with “Alarm Level” in “Audio Output” (page  
114) of the AUDIO SET menu.  
Error Indications  
The camcorder stops all operations, including recording, if an error indication occurs (see below).  
Error indication on Buzzer  
LCD/viewfinder  
Tally  
lamps  
Cause and measures  
E + Error code  
Continuous Rapidly  
flashing  
The camcorder may be defective.  
Turn off the power and check that the connected devices,  
cables, and media are in proper condition. If the error persists  
when you reapply power, consult Sony service personnel.  
(If power cannot be turned off by setting the power switch to  
OFF, remove both the battery pack and the DC IN source.)  
Warning Indications  
When one of the following indications is generated, follow the message to clear the problem.  
Warning indication Buzzer  
on LCD/viewfinder  
Tally  
lamps  
Cause and measures  
Media Near Full  
Intermittent Flashing  
Free space on the SxS memory card has become insufficient.  
Replace it with another at the earliest opportunity.  
No space is left on the SxS memory card. Recording, clip  
copying and clip division cannot be performed.  
Replace it with another.  
Media Full  
Continuous Rapidly  
flashing  
Battery Near End  
Battery End  
Intermittent Flashing  
The battery power will be exhausted soon.  
Charge the battery pack at the earliest opportunity.  
The battery pack is exhausted. Recording cannot be  
performed.  
Continuous Rapidly  
flashing  
Connect a power source via the DC IN connector or stop  
operation to charge the battery pack.  
The internal temperature has risen above a safe operation  
limit.  
Temperature High  
Intermittent Flashing  
Suspend operation, turn off the power, and wait until the  
temperature falls.  
Voltage Low  
Intermittent Flashing  
The DC IN voltage has become low (stage 1).  
Check the power supply.  
Insufficient Voltage  
Continuous Rapidly  
flashing  
The DC IN voltage is too low (stage 2). Recording cannot be  
performed.  
Connect other power source.  
Battery Error  
Please Change Battery.  
An error was detected with the battery pack.  
Replace the battery pack with a normal one.  
Error/Warning Indications  
149  
               
Warning indication Buzzer  
on LCD/viewfinder  
Tally  
lamps  
Cause and measures  
Backup Battery End  
Please Change.  
The remaining power of the backup battery is insufficient.  
Replace the battery with a new one.  
1)  
A partitioned memory card or one that contains recorded clips  
exceeding the number permitted with this camcorder is loaded.  
This card cannot be used with this camcorder. Remove it and  
load a compatible card.  
Unknown Media(A)  
Please Change.  
Reached Clip Number  
Limit  
Cannot Record on  
The maximum number of clips for a single memory card is  
reached. No more clip can be recorded on the card.  
Replace it with another card.  
1)  
Media(A)  
Media Error  
An error occurred with the memory card. The card requires  
restoration.  
1)  
Media(A) Needs to be  
Remove the card, load it again, and restore it.  
Restored  
Media Error  
Cannot Record to  
Recording cannot be done, as the memory card is defective.  
As playback may be possible, it is recommended to replace it  
with another card after copying the clips, as required.  
1)  
Media(A)  
Media Error  
Neither recording nor playback can be done, as the memory  
card is defective.  
1)  
Cannot Use Media(A)  
It cannot be operated with this camcorder. Replace it with  
another card.  
1)  
A card of a different file system or an unformatted card was  
inserted. It cannot be used with this camcorder.  
Replace it with another card or format it with this camcorder.  
Cannot Use Media(A)  
Unsupported File System  
Video Format Mismatch  
The external signal input via the i.LINK connection cannot be  
recorded, as the video format setting is different from the  
signal format of the external input signal.  
Change “System” of the OTHERS menu to match it to that of  
the external signal.  
Copy Protected Input  
Cannot Record  
The external signal input via the i.LINK connection cannot be  
recorded, as the stream is copy-protected.  
Check the input signal.  
DVCAM Input Signal!  
Cannot Record  
The external signal input via the i.LINK connection cannot be  
recorded, as it is a DVCAM stream.  
Media Error  
Playback Halted  
An error occurred in reading data from the memory card, and  
playback cannot be continued.  
If this frequently occurs, change the memory card after  
copying the clips, as required.  
1)  
Recording cannot be done, as an error occurred with the  
memory card.  
Media(A) Error  
If this frequently occurs, change the memory card.  
The battery power of the connected HDD will be exhausted  
soon.  
2)  
Intermittent Flashing  
HDD A Battery Near  
End  
Change the battery at the earliest opportunity.  
2)  
Continuous Rapidly  
flashing  
The battery of the connected HDD is exhausted. Recording  
cannot be performed.  
HDD A Battery End  
Stop operation to change the battery.  
There is not enough capacity for copying.  
Replace the card with another one.  
Not Enough Capacity  
1)  
Change Media (A)  
Reached Duplication  
Limit  
The card have already ten clips having the same name as that  
you tried to duplicate.  
1)  
Replace the card with another one.  
Change Media (A)  
Error/Warning Indications  
150  
Warning indication Buzzer  
on LCD/viewfinder  
Tally  
lamps  
Cause and measures  
Not Enough Capacity  
Cannot Divide  
There is not enough capacity for dividing a clip.  
Media Reached  
Rewriting Limit  
The memory card comes to the end of its service life. Make a  
backup copy and replace the card with another one as soon as  
possible. Recording/playback may not be performed properly  
if you continue to use the card.  
1)  
Change Media (A)  
For details, refer to the operating instructions of the memory  
card.  
1)(B) for the card in slot B  
2)B for a HDD connected to slot B  
Error/Warning Indications  
151  
MPEG-2 Video Patent  
Portfolio License  
About Bitmap Fonts  
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN  
CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY  
MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE  
MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING  
VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED  
MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED  
WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER  
This product uses RICOH Bitmap Fonts  
produced and sold by Ricoh Company, Ltd.  
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2  
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS  
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250  
STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,  
COLORADO 80206.  
“PACKAGED MEDIA” means any storage  
media storing MPEG-2 video information such as  
DVD movie which are sold/distributed to general  
consumers. Disc replicators or sellers of the  
PACKAGED MEDIA need to obtain licenses for  
their own business from MPEG LA. Please  
contact MPEG LA for any further information.  
MPEG LA. L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET,  
SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206  
http://www.mpegla.com  
MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio License / About Bitmap Fonts  
152  
   
About OpenSSL  
Because it uses the OpenSSL Toolkit, this product uses software developed by the OpenSSL Project  
(http://www.openssl.org/).  
OpenSSL License  
---------------  
/* ====================================================================  
* Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.  
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions  
* are met:  
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright  
*
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright  
*
*
*
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in  
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the  
distribution.  
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this  
*
*
*
*
software must display the following acknowledgment:  
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project  
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"  
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to  
*
*
*
*
endorse or promote products derived from this software without  
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact  
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"  
*
*
*
nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written  
permission of the OpenSSL Project.  
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following  
*
*
*
*
acknowledgment:  
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project  
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"  
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY  
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE  
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR  
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,  
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT  
About OpenSSL  
153  
 
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;  
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)  
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,  
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)  
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED  
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
* ====================================================================  
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young  
* ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim  
* Hudson ([email protected]).  
*
*/  
Original SSLeay License  
-----------------------  
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected])  
* All rights reserved.  
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written  
* by Eric Young ([email protected]).  
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.  
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as  
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions  
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,  
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation  
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms  
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).  
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in  
* the code are not to be removed.  
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution  
* as the author of the parts of the library used.  
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or  
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.  
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions  
* are met:  
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright  
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright  
*
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software  
*
*
*
*
*
must display the following acknowledgement:  
"This product includes cryptographic software written by  
Eric Young ([email protected])"  
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library  
being used are not cryptographic related :-).  
About OpenSSL  
154  
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from  
*
*
*
the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:  
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"  
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND  
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE  
*
*
*
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE  
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS  
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)  
*
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT  
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY  
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
*
* SUCH DAMAGE.  
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or  
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be  
* copied and put under another distribution licence  
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]  
*/  
About OpenSSL  
155  
With one SBS-64G1A  
SP or DVCAM mode: Approx. 280 min.  
HQ mode: Approx. 200 min.  
Specifications  
Note  
The actual recording/playback time may  
differ slightly from the values shown  
here, depending on usage conditions,  
memory characteristics, etc.  
General  
Power requirements  
DC 12 V (11.0 V to 17.0 V)  
Continuous operation time (with BP-U60)  
Approx. 130 minutes (HD-SDI Dual-  
Link On)  
Power consumption  
Approx. 18 W (Typical) (HD-SDI Dual-  
Approx. 170 minutes (HD-SDI Dual-  
Link Off)  
Link Off, VF On, LCD monitor Off)  
Max. 24 W (Typical) (HD-SDI Dual-  
Link On, VF On, LCD monitor On)  
Mass  
Approx. 2.4 kg (5 lb 4.7 oz) (without  
accessories)  
Operating temperature  
0ºC to +40ºC (32ºF to 104ºF)  
Dimensions (w/h/d)  
Storage temperature  
–20ºC to +60ºC (–4ºF to 140ºF)  
Approx. 151 × 189 × 210 mm  
1
3
(6 × 7 / × 8 / inches)  
2
8
Recording/playback formats  
(PMW-F3L, not including projecting  
parts)  
Video  
HD HQ Mode: MPEG-2 MP@HL,  
35 Mbps / VBR  
Camera Block  
1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 25P,  
23.98P  
Pickup device  
Super-35mm-equivalent CMOS image  
1440 × 1080/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P,  
25P, 23.98P  
sensor  
1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P,  
23.98P  
Built-in ND filters  
OFF: Clear  
1
HD SP Mode: MPEG-2 MP@H-14,  
25 Mbps /CBR  
1: / ND  
8
1
2: / ND  
64  
1440 × 1080 /59.94i, 50i (23.98P is  
converted to 59.94i in 2-3 pull-  
down processing.)  
Sensitivity  
T11 ISO800 (Typical)  
SD Mode: DVCAM  
Video S/N  
720 × 480/59.94i, 29.97P  
720 × 576/50i, 25P  
63 dB (Y) (Typical)  
Gain  
Audio  
–3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18 dB, AGC  
LPCM (16 bits, 48 kHz, 2 channels)  
Shutter speed  
Recording/playback time  
1
1
/
to  
/
sec.  
32  
2000  
With one SBP-16  
Slow shutter  
2 to 8 frames  
SP or DVCAM mode: Approx. 70 min.  
HQ mode: Approx. 50 min.  
With one SBP-32 or SBS-32G1A  
SP or DVCAM mode: Approx. 140 min.  
HQ mode: Approx. 100 min.  
Specifications  
156  
     
Audio Block  
Inputs/Outputs  
Input connectors  
Sampling frequency  
48 kHz  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors  
XLR 3-pin (2), female  
LINE: +4 dBu  
Quantization  
16 bits  
Headroom  
MIC: –20 dBu to –65 dBu (3-dB steps)  
(Reference level: 0 dBu=0.775 Vrms)  
20 dB  
Built-in speaker  
GENLOCK IN connector  
Monaural  
BNC type (1), 1.0 Vp-p, 75Ω,  
unbalanced  
Output: 250 mW  
TC IN connector  
BNC type (1), 0.5 V to 1.8 Vp-p, 10kΩ  
Displays  
DC IN connector  
LCD monitor  
XLR 4-pin (1)  
Screen size  
Output connectors  
8.8 cm diagonal (3.5-inch)  
Aspect ratio  
VIDEO OUT connector  
16:9  
BNC type (1), 1.0 Vp-p, 75Ω, HD-Y or  
analog composite signal  
Picture size  
640 (H) × 3 (RGB) × 480 (V) delta  
sequence  
SDI OUT connector  
BNC type (1)  
Transmission  
Hybrid (semi-transmissive) type  
HDMI OUT connector  
Type A (1)  
HD SDI A/B connectors  
Viewfinder  
BNC type (2)  
Screen size  
1.148 cm diagonal (0.452-inch)  
TC OUT connector  
BNC type (1), 1.0 Vp-p, 75Ω  
Aspect ratio  
AUDIO OUT CH-1/CH-2 connectors  
RCA phono jacks (2)  
16:9  
–10 dBu (47kΩ load, reference level)  
Picture elements  
852 (H) × 480 (V)  
Headphone connector  
Stereo mini jack (1), –18 dBu (reference  
level output, 16Ω load)  
Media Block  
Input/output connectors  
Card slots  
Type: Express Card34  
i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector  
i.LINK, IEEE1394, 4-pin connector (1),  
S400  
Number of slots: 2  
Connector: Conforming to PCMCIA  
Express Card  
REMOTE connector  
8-pin round connector (1)  
Specifications  
157  
       
USB connector  
Mini-B/USB2.0 Hi-Speed (1)  
Supplied Accessories  
Option connector  
USB Type A (1)  
Lens mount adapter (1)  
It is mounted on the camcorder at the factory.  
Microphone (1)  
SPARE connector  
10-pin round connector (1)  
Wind screen (1)  
It is attached on the microphone at the  
factory.  
Infrared Remote Commander (1)  
USB cable (1)  
Shoulder belt (1)  
Lenses (Supplied with the PMW-  
F3K)  
Lithium battery (CR2032 for backup) (1)  
It is mounted in the camcorder at the factory.  
Lithium battery (CR2025 for the IR Remote  
Commander) (1)  
SCL-P35T20  
Focal length  
35 mm  
It is mounted in the IR Remote Commander  
at the factory.  
CD-ROM:  
Iris  
Manual, T2.0 to C (close)  
Utility Software for XDCAM (Dedicated  
application software, SxS Device Driver  
Software) (1)  
Focus  
Manual, 0.35 mm to ∞  
Filter diameter  
Manuals for Solid-State Memory Camcorder  
(PDF Operating Instructions and Supplement)  
(1)  
95 mm  
SCL-P50T20  
Operating Instructions (English version and  
Japanese version, 1 each)  
Focal length  
50 mm  
With PMW-F3K only  
SCL-P35T20 (focal length: 35mm) (1)  
SCL-P50T20 (focal length: 50mm) (1)  
SCL-P85T20 (focal length: 85mm) (1)  
Iris  
Manual, T2.0 to C (close)  
Focus  
Manual, 0.5 mm to ∞  
Optional Accessories  
Filter diameter  
Battery pack: BP-U60  
95 mm  
Battery charger: BC-U1, BC-U2  
AC adaptor: AC-DN10, AC-DN2B  
DC cable: CCDD-X2  
SCL-P85T20  
Focal length  
SxS memory card:  
85 mm  
SxS PRO series  
Iris  
SxS-1 series  
Manual, T2.0 to C (close)  
SxS memory card USB reader/writer:  
SBAC-US10  
Focus  
Mobile storage unit: PXU-MS240  
Media adaptor:  
Manual, 0.85 mm to ∞  
MEAD-MS01 (for “Memory Stick PRO-HG  
Duo” HXA series)  
Filter diameter  
95 mm  
MEAD-SD01 (for SDHC card)  
Electret condenser microphone:  
ECM-673, ECM-680S  
Wireless microphone: UWP-V1  
Professional hard disk unit: PHU-120R  
Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
Specifications  
158  
     
Remote control unit: RM-B150, RM-B750  
Wi-Fi adapter CBK-WA01  
Notes  
• Always make a test recording, and verify that it • Always verify that the unit is operating properly  
was recorded successfully.  
before use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE  
FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND  
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR  
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING,  
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION  
OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF  
FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS  
RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL  
STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER  
MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO  
RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT  
ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT  
OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO  
FAILURE OF THIS UNIT, EITHER DURING  
THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER  
EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY, OR  
FOR ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER.  
Specifications  
159  
B
Backlight 61  
Index  
backlight (LCD) 26  
backlight (VF) 27  
backup battery 145  
BARS/CAM button 57  
Battery Alarm 124  
Battery INFO 125  
BATTERY INFO display 23  
Battery Pack 22  
BATTERY RELEASE button 22  
BATTERY/MEDIA Status 105  
BC-U1 Battery Charger 22  
Black 77  
Black Gamma 78  
BP-U60 22  
BRT DISP 61  
BRT Disp 62  
built-in clock 24  
Numerics  
23.98P Output 116  
3D-Link Mode 123  
5600K CC button 42  
5600K CC filter 42  
A
AC Adaptor 23  
Access lamps 35  
accessory shoe 14  
add shot marks 99  
AGC mode 47  
All Clips DEL 79  
All Reset 123, 131  
All-Clip thumbnail screen 88  
Angle mode 48  
Area Detection 78  
Aspect Marker 46  
Aspect Mask 46  
Aspect Select 46  
Assign Button 61, 124  
assignable buttons 61  
ATW Hold 61  
ATW Speed 112  
Audio 56  
Audio Input 113  
Built-in speaker 90  
BUTTON/REMOTE Status 105  
Buzzer 149  
C
CACHE REC lamp 66  
Camera Data 123, 131  
CAMERA SET Menu 110  
CAMERA Status 102  
CANCEL button 93  
Card slots 35  
Center Marker 46  
Clear 81  
AUDIO LEVEL controls 56  
audio monitoring 57  
AUDIO OUT CH-1/CH-2 connectors 134  
Audio Output 114  
audio recording levels 56  
AUDIO SELECT switches 56  
AUDIO SET Menu 113  
AUDIO Status 103  
Auto Black Bal. 45, 110  
Auto Naming 39, 82  
Auto Shutter mode 48  
Auto Tracing White 43  
Auto White Balance 43  
AUTO WHT BAL button 44  
CLIP INFO screen 94  
clip name 39  
Clip Name Disp 82  
Clip Operation menu 92, 93  
Clips 96  
Clips&General 96  
Clock mode 53  
Clock Set 123  
CMOS Image Sensors 144  
color bar 57  
Color Bar Type 110  
Color Detection 78  
Copy 78  
copy a clip 95  
Index  
160  
 
Copy All 96, 128  
COPY CLIP 95  
Country 126  
Format Media 36, 130  
Formatting 36  
Frame Rec 111  
Frame Recording 64  
Free Run mode 53  
Freeze Mix 61, 69  
Cueing up 91  
D
Date/Time 25  
G
gain 47  
DC IN Power 23  
delete a clip 96  
DELETE CLIP 96  
delete shot marks 99  
Deleting Clips 79  
diopter compensation 27  
DISP CLIP INFO 94  
Display On/Off 119  
DISPLAY/BATT INFO button 20, 23  
divide a clip 100  
Gain Setting 48  
Gain Setup 48, 110  
GAIN switch 47  
Gamma 77  
General Files 83  
Genlock 125  
GENLOCK IN connector 141  
Guide Frame 46  
DIVIDE CLIP 100  
Down Converter 116  
Dual-Link & Gamma Select 116  
H
HD Detail 74  
HD SDI A/B connectors 135  
HDMI OUT connector 134  
Headphone connector 57, 90  
high-speed playback 90  
HISTOGRAM 61  
Histogram 62  
E
ECS 48  
ECS Frequency 49  
E-E Display mode 20  
Eject buttons 35  
Horizontal Inv. 113  
Hours Meter 124  
electronic shutter 48  
Entering a character string 109  
Error Indications 149  
EXPAND CLIP 97  
EXPAND CLIP screen 97  
Expanded Focus 61  
EXPANDED FOCUS button 51  
ExpressCard slot of a computer 135  
Extended Clear Scan 48  
external monitor 134  
External Synchronization 141  
Eyepiece focusing knob 27  
I
i.LINK 140  
i.LINK cable 140  
i.LINK(HDV/DV) connector 138  
index frame 99  
index frame image 86  
Information 121  
Input Source Select 38, 115  
InstallOption 130  
Interval Rec 111  
Interval Recording 62  
IR Remote 32, 61, 124  
IR Remote Commander 32  
iris opening 50  
F
F FWD button 90  
F REV button 90  
Fixed gain mode 47  
Fixed Shutter mode 48  
flange focal length 30  
Flicker Reduce 52, 111  
J
Jog dial 17, 107  
Index  
161  
OK-Clip thumbnail screen 88  
Operation 121  
Option 129  
K
Knee 77  
Option connector 18  
OTHERS Menu 123  
L
Language 24, 123  
Last Clip DEL 61, 79  
P
P.Cache Rec 65, 111  
P.FROFILE menu 70, 73  
PAL Area 40  
LCD B.LIGHT switch 26  
LCD BRIGHT buttons 26  
LCD monitor 26  
LCD/VF Adjust 27, 28  
LCD/VF SET Menu 117  
LENS FILE Menu 121  
Lens Files 30  
Pausing 90  
Peaking 51, 117  
PEAKING button 51  
Picture Cache 61  
Picture Cache Recording 65  
PICTURE PROFILE button 70  
Picture Profiles 70  
Plan.Metadata 80, 81  
planning metadata 80  
PLAY/PAUSE button 89  
Post for the shoulder strap 14  
Power switch 24  
Lens IF 29, 113  
LENS INFO 61  
Lens Info 62  
Load / Slot(A) 80  
Load /Slot(B) 80  
Low Key SAT 78  
LUT Memory 123  
PP Data 78  
PREV button 91  
Profile Name 73  
Properties 81  
M
Matrix 73  
Media Full 37  
Media Near Full 37  
MENU button 107  
Menu controls 107  
microphone holder 31  
MONITOR VOLUME buttons 57, 90  
Multi Matrix 73  
R
Rec 61  
Rec Review 38, 60, 61, 112  
REC REVIEW button 38, 60  
Rec Run mode 53  
Recall 131  
reference tone 57  
Regen mode 53  
Remove Option 130  
Reset 78  
N
ND Adjustment 123  
ND FILTER switch 42  
ND filters 42  
NDF 54  
restoration 37  
Network 128  
NEXT button 91  
NTSC Area 40  
S
S&Q dial 67  
S&Q Motion 67, 111  
Safety Area 45  
Safety Zone 45  
SBAC-US10 136  
SD Detail 75  
O
OK Mark 62  
OK mark 59, 95  
OK MARK ADD 95  
OK MARK DEL 95  
SDI OUT connector 134  
Index  
162  
SDI Rec Control 117  
SDI/HDMI Out Display 116, 134  
SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select 115, 134  
SEL/SET dial 107  
SET INDEX PIC 100  
setup file 131  
Setup menus 106  
Shockless White 112  
SHOT MARK 98  
Tripod receptacle 18  
Troubleshooting 147  
U
USB cable 136  
USB connector 18  
user bits 55  
Users Bit 120  
UTC 24  
SHOT MARK screen 98  
SHOT MARK1 98  
Shot Mark1 61  
SHOT MARK1 DEL 99  
SHOT MARK2 98  
Shot Mark2 61  
SHOT MARK2 DEL 99  
shot marks 58, 91  
Shutter 49, 110  
SHUTTER switch 49  
Skin Tone Detail 76  
S-LOG LUT Select 116  
SLOT SELECT button 35, 88  
Slow & Quick Motion 67  
Slow Shutter 48, 49, 110  
Speed mode 48  
Spotlight 61  
STATUS button 101  
status screens 101  
STOP button 90  
Store 131  
SxS Device Driver Software 135  
SxS memory card 34  
V
Version 130  
Version Up 130  
VF Mode 61  
VIDEO OUT connector 134  
Video Out Display 116, 134  
VIDEO SET Menu 115  
VIDEO Status 104  
Viewfinder 27  
Viewfinder release lever 143  
W
Warning Indications 149  
White 74  
WHITE BALANCE 43  
white balance 43  
WHITE BALANCE switch 43  
White Switch 112  
Wi-Fi 129  
write protection 34  
Z
T
ZEBRA button 47  
zebra patterns 46  
Zebra Select 47  
Zebra1 Level 47  
Zoom Position 51  
Tally 124  
Tally lamps 149  
TC Format 54, 120  
TC IN connector 141  
TC Out 142  
TC OUT connector 142  
TC/UB SET Menu 120  
TC/U-BIT/DURATION button 55, 90  
THUMBNAIL button 88, 90  
Time Zone 24, 123  
Timecode 120  
Trigger Mode 125  
Index  
163  

Sony XR C7220 User Manual
Sony VCTHM1 User Manual
Sony VCT 60AV User Manual
Sony HANDYCAM DVD608 User Manual
Sony Handycam DCR TRV900E User Manual
Sony CDX GT111 User Manual
Sirius Satellite Radio Stiletto 2 SL2UG022508 User Manual
Sangean Electronics Radio RCR 5 User Manual
Samsung W75D User Manual
Samsung SCD353 User Manual